BMW 2 Series

Contents Owner's Manual
for Vehicle
A-Z The Ultimate

Driving Machine®
THE BMW 2 SERIES

CONVERTIBLE.
OWNER'S MANUAL.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Online
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 959 847 - II/15
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2 Series Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or
Integrated Owner's Manual are found in the appendix of the
printed Quick Reference for the vehicle.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
BMW AG
The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.

Additional information on the Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Online
© 2015 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English II/15, 03 15 490
Inf
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached ormat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online
Addendum
ADDENDUM TO OWNER'S MANUAL

We wanted to provide you with some updates we recommend that you make sure that any
and clarifications with respect to the printed such parts and/or accessories are appropri-
BMW Owner's Manual. These updates and ate for use on your vehicle.
clarifications will supersede the materials con- 4. At page 7, under the warranty section's dis-
tained in that document. cussion of homologation, where it states
1. Where the terms “service center,” “the ser- that you “cannot lodge warranty claims for
vice center,” “your service center,” “service your vehicle there,” the text should read
specialist,” or “service” are used in the that you “may not be able to lodge warranty
Owner's Manual, we wanted to clarify that claims for your vehicle there.”
the terms refer to a BMW dealer's service 5. At page 7, under the “Parts and accesso-
center or another service center or repair ries” section, in the sixth sentence, the
shop that employs trained personnel that word “cannot” should read “does not.”
can perform maintenance and repair work
6. At page 59, in the “Check and replace
on your vehicle in accordance with BMW
safety belts” section, the text beginning,
specifications.
“This should only be done by your service
2. Where the text of the Owner's Manual con- center …” should be disregarded and the
tains an affirmative instruction to contact a following text should be read in lieu thereof:
“service center” or “your service center,” “BMW recommends having this work per-
we wanted to clarify that BMW recom- formed by a service center as it is important
mends that, if you are faced with one of the that this safety feature functions properly.”
situations addressed by that text, you con-
7. At page 102, under the heading: “Hints,”
tact or seek the assistance of a BMW
the sentence beginning, “Only have the air-
dealer's service center or another service
bags checked …” should be disregarded
center or repair shop that employs trained
and the following language should be read
personnel that can perform maintenance
in lieu thereof: “The manufacturer of your
and repair work on your vehicle in accor-
vehicle strongly suggests that you have air-
dance with BMW specifications.
bags checked, repaired or dismantled and
While BMW of North America LLC, at no the system scrapped by your service center
cost to you, will pay for repairs required by or an authorized repair shop for handling
the limited warranties provided with respect explosives.”
to your vehicle and for maintenance under
8. At page 102, in the “Triggered rollover pro-
the Maintenance Program during the appli-
tection system” section, the sentence
cable warranty and maintenance coverage
beginning, “Have this work performed only
periods, you are free to elect, both during
by our service center …” should be disre-
those periods and thereafter, to have main-
garded and the following text should be
tenance and repair work provided by other
read in lieu thereof: “BMW recommends
service centers or repair shops.
having this work performed by a service
3. Where the Owner's Manual makes refer- center as it is important that this safety fea-
ence to parts and accessories having been ture functions properly.”
approved by BMW, those references are
9. At page 157 under the heading: “Objects
intended to reflect that those parts and
within the range of movement of the ped-
accessories are recommended by BMW of
als” and at page 213 under the heading:
North America LLC. You may elect to use
“Carpets and floor mats,” the paragraph
other parts and accessories, but,
Infifor
you
mat do,
i
onProvidedby:
Online
Addendum
that begins: “Only use floor mats …” should tires to determine if they are suitable for use
be disregarded and the following language on your vehicle.
should be read in lieu thereof: “The manu- 14. At page 185, under the heading: “Snow
facturer of your vehicle recommends that Chains,” the text should be disregarded and
you use floor mats that have been identified the following text should be read in lieu
by it as appropriate for use in your vehicle thereof:
and that can be properly fixed in place.”
Only certain types of fine-link snow chains
10. At page 162, under the heading: “Have have been tested by the manufacturer of
maintenance carried out,” the sentence your vehicle and are determined by the
beginning, “The maintenance should be manufacturer of your vehicle to be road safe
carried out …” should be disregarded and and are recommended by the manufacturer
the following text should be read in lieu of your vehicle.
thereof: “BMW recommends that you have
Information about recommended snow
the maintenance carried out by your service
chains is available from a service center.
center.”
15. At page 188, under the heading “Hood,” the
11. At page 174, under the heading “Tire infla-
sentence beginning, “If you are unfamiliar”
tion specifications,” the sentence begin-
should be disregarded.
ning, “Tire inflation pressure specifications
apply to approved tire sizes …” should be 16. At page 191, under the heading: “Engine oil
disregarded. change,” the text should be disregarded
and in lieu thereof should be read as follows:
12. At page 180, under the heading: “Mount-
ing,” the paragraph beginning, “Have BMW recommends that you have the oil
mounting and balancing …” should be dis- changed at your BMW dealer's service cen-
regarded and the following text should be ter or at another service center that has
read in lieu thereof: “BMW recommends trained personnel that can perform the work
that you have mounting and balancing per- in accordance with BMW specifications.
formed by your service center or a tire 17. At page 193, under the heading: “Service
mounting specialist.” and Warranty Information Booklet for US
13. At page 181, under the heading: “Approved models and Warranty and Service Guide
wheels and tires,” the term “Approved” Booklet for Canadian models,” the second
should be disregarded and in lieu thereof, paragraph should be disregarded and the
the term “Recommended” should be read following text read in lieu thereof:
in its place. In addition, the text of that sec- The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
tion should be disregarded and the follow- mends that you have maintenance and
ing text should be read in lieu thereof: repair performed by your BMW dealer's ser-
The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly vice center or another service center or
suggests that you use wheels and tires that repair shop that employs trained personnel
have been recommended by the vehicle that can perform maintenance and repair
manufacturer for your vehicle type; other- work on your vehicle in accordance with
wise, for example, despite having the same BMW specifications. The manufacturer of
official size ratings, variations can lead to your vehicle recommends that you maintain
body contact and with it, the risk of severe records of all maintenance and repair work
accidents. performed on your vehicle.
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not 18. At page 196 and page 198, where it reads:
evaluate non-recommended wheels and “Do not perform work/bulb replacement on
I
nformat i
onPr
ovi dedby:
Online
Addendum
xenon headlights,” that text should be dis-

regarded and in lieu thereof the following
text should be read: “Xenon headlight work
or replacement can cause serious and fatal
injuries.” In the text that follows, where it
reads: “[h]ave any work on the xenon light-
ing system … ,” the following words should
be read as preceding that passage: “It is
strongly suggested that you …”
19. At page 202, under the “Battery replace-
ment” section, the text should be disre-
garded and in lieu thereof the following text
should be read:
Use of recommended vehicle batteries
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that you use vehicle batteries that it
has tested and recommends for use in your
vehicle; otherwise the vehicle could be
damaged and systems or functions may not
be fully available.
After a battery replacement, the manufac-
turer of your vehicle recommends that you
have the battery registered on your vehicle
by a service center to ensure that all com-
fort functions are fully available, and that
any “check control” messages of these
comfort functions are no longer displayed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Online
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Mobility
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to 170 Refueling
page 220. 172 Fuel
174 Wheels and tires
187 Engine compartment
6 Notes
189 Engine oil
At a glance 192 Coolant
14 Cockpit 193 Maintenance
18 iDrive 195 Replacing components
27 Voice activation system 204 Breakdown assistance
30 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 210 Care
Controls Reference
34 Opening and closing 218 Technical data
54 Adjusting 220 Everything from A to Z
64 Transporting children safely
67 Driving
80 Displays
94 Lights
99 Safety
117 Driving stability control systems
123 Driving comfort
135 Climate control
143 Interior equipment
151 Storage compartments
Driving tips
156 Things to remember when driving
159 Loading
161 Saving fuel
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Online
Notes
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual Symbols
Indicates precautions that must be followed
Orientation
precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ personal injury and serious damage to the
ular topic is by using the index. vehicle.
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in ◄ Marks the end of a specific item of
the first chapter. information.
Refers to measures that can be taken to
Updates made after the editorial
help protect the environment.
deadline
"..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to
Any updates made after the editorial deadline
select individual functions.
for the Owner's Manuals are found in the ap‐
pendix of the printed Quick Reference for the ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
vehicle. activation system.
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
User's manual for Navigation, voice activation system.
Entertainment, Communication
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ Symbols on vehicle components
munication and the short commands of the Indicates that you should consult the
voice activation system are described in a sep‐ relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
arate user's manual, which is also included information on a particular part or assembly.
with the onboard literature.
Vehicle features and options

Additional sources of
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
information all standard, country-specific and optional
The service center will be happy to answer any equipment that is offered in the model series.
other questions you may have. Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, we also de‐
scribe and illustrate features that are not avail‐
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is
able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐
available on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
lected optional features or the country-specific
version.
BMW Driver’s Guide App
This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems.
The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐
The respectively applicable country provisions
tries as an app. Additional information on the
must be observed when using the respective
Internet:
features and systems.
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
For any options and equipment not described
in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Handbooks.
I
nfor
mat
ionProvidedby:
6
Online
Notes
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls Therefore, have this work performed only by a
are arranged differently from what is shown in BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐
the illustrations. ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐
ately trained personnel.
If work is not carried out properly, there is a
Status of the Owner's danger of subsequent damage and related
Manual safety hazards.
Basic information Parts and accessories

The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a BMW recommends using parts and accesso‐
policy of constant development that is con‐ ries approved by BMW for this purpose.
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to Your BMW center is the right contact for genu‐
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐ ine BMW parts and accessories, other prod‐
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐ ucts approved by BMW and related qualified
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from advice.
those in your vehicle.
BMW has tested these products for safety and
suitability in relation to BMW vehicles.
Updates made after the editorial
deadline BMW can assume responsibility for them.
However, we cannot assume any responsibility
Any updates made after the editorial deadline
whatsoever for parts and accessories that have
for the Owner's Manuals are found in the ap‐
not been specifically approved by BMW.
pendix of the printed Quick Reference for the
vehicle. BMW cannot evaluate whether each individual
product from another manufacturer can be
used with BMW vehicles without presenting a
safety hazard. This guarantee does not apply
For your own safety when country-specific government approval
has been granted. Testing of this kind may fail
Warranty
to embrace the entire range of potential oper‐
Your vehicle is technically configured for the ating conditions to which components might
operating conditions and registration require‐ be exposed on BMW vehicles. Such products
ments applying in the country of first delivery - could conceivably fail to comply with BMW's
homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated own stringent quality standards.
in a different country it might be necessary to
adapt your vehicle to potentially differing oper‐ California Proposition 65 Warning
ating conditions and permit requirements. If
California laws require us to state the following
your vehicle does not comply with the homolo‐
warning:
gation requirements in a certain country you
cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
there. Further information can be obtained bile components and parts, including compo‐
from your Service Centre. nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
Maintenance and repairs State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
materials and high-performance electronics,
products of component wear contain or emit
requires suitable maintenance and I
repair
nf ormawork.
t
ionProvidedby:
7
Online
Notes
chemicals known to the State of California to Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ ures:
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ ▷ BMW Maintenance system
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
for US models
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and Canadian models
water. If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in seri‐
Service and warranty ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
We recommend that you read this publication not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐ Warranty.
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
Data memory
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐ Many electronic components on your vehicle
ranty. are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
tion about the condition of the vehicle, events
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐ and faults. This technical information generally
ited Warranty. records the state of a component, a module, a
Detailed information about these warranties is system or the environment:
listed in the Service and Warranty Information ▷ Operating mode of system components, fill
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and levels for instance.
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐
designed to meet the particular operating con‐ tion speed/vehicle speed, deceleration,
ditions and homologation requirements in your transverse acceleration.
country and continental region in order to de‐
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
tem components, e.g., lights and brakes.
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐ tions such as airbag deployment or engag‐
hicle to meet different prevailing operating ing the stability control system.
conditions and homologation requirements. ▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.
You should also be aware of any applicable This data is purely technical in nature and is
warranty limitations or exclusions for such used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐
country or region. In such case, please contact mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over
Customer Relations for further information. routes traveled cannot be created from this
data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐
Maintenance pair services, service processes, warranty
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐
road safety, operational reliability and the New mation can be read out from the event and
Vehicle Limited Warranty. I
nformati
fault
onProvi
memories by the service personnel, in‐
dedby:
8
Online
Notes
cluding the manufacturer, using special diag‐ conditions and no personal data, e.g., name,
nostic tools. You can obtain further information gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
there if you need it. After an error is corrected, However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
the information in the fault memory is deleted ment, could combine the EDR data with the
or overwritten on a continuous basis. type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
With the vehicle in use there are situations quired during a crash investigation.
where you can associate these technical data To read data recorded by an EDR, special
with individuals if combined with other infor‐ equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
the assistance of an expert. enforcement, that have the special equipment,
Additional functions that are contractually can read the information if they have access to
agreed with the customer - such as vehicle the vehicle or the EDR.
emergency locating - you can transmit certain
vehicle data from the vehicle.
Vehicle identification
number
Event Data Recorder EDR
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
The vehicle identification number can be found
less.
in the engine compartment.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as: The vehicle identification number can also be
▷ How various systems in your vehicle were found behind the windshield.
operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
Reporting safety defects
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing For US customers
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
The following only applies to vehicles owned
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling. and operated in the US.
These data can help provide a better under‐ If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
standing of the circumstances in which which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
crashes and injuries occur. jury or death, you should immediately inform
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
recorded by the EDR under normal driving North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
Informat ionPr
ovi dedby:
9
Online
Notes
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone

1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
formation about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the
toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10
Online
Notes
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11
Online
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Online
At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Online
At a glance Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country
specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the
series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems.
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
All around the steering wheel
1 Power windows, all 46 Front fog lights 97

2 Power windows, individual 46
3 Exterior mirror operation 61 Parking lights 94
4 Glove compartment on the driver's
side 152
Low beams 94
Driver assistance systems
Intelligent Safety 108
Lane departure warning 114
5 Lights
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
14
Online
Cockpit At a glance
Automatic headlight con‐ 9 Steering wheel buttons, right

trol 95 Entertainment source
Daytime running lights 95
Adaptive Light Control 95
Volume
High-beam Assistant 96
Instrument lighting 97
Voice activation 27
6 Steering column stalk, left Telephone, see user's manual for

Turn signal 71 Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication
Thumbwheel for selection lists 88
High beams, head‐
light flasher 71 10 Start/stop the engine and switch
the ignition on/off 68
High-beam Assistant 96
Auto Start/Stop function 69
Roadside parking lights 95

11 Steering column stalk, right
On-board computer 89 Wiper 72
7 Steering wheel buttons, left Rain sensor 73
Store speed 123
Clean the windshields and head‐
lights 74
Resume speed 123
12 Horn, total area
Cruise control on/off, inter‐ 13 Steering wheel heating 63
rupt 123 14 Adjust the steering wheel 63
Cruise control rocker switch 123 15 Unlock hood 188
8 Instrument cluster 80
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
15
Online
At a glance Cockpit
All around the center console
1 Control Display 18 9 Parking brake 71

2 Glove compartment 151 10 PDC Park Distance Control 125
3 Ventilation 141 Rearview camera 128
4 Hazard warning system 204 Parking assistant 130
11 Driving Dynamics Control 119

Central locking system 40
Dynamic Stability Control 117

5 Radio/CD/Multimedia, see user's manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐
12 Steptronic transmission selector
nication
lever 75
6 Climate control 135
Manual transmission selector lever 75
7 Controller with buttons 18
8 Convertible top 47
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
16
Online
Cockpit At a glance
All about the interior rearview mirror
1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ 3 Interior lights 97

quest 204
2 Reading lights 97 4 Indicator lamp, front-seat pas‐

senger airbag 101
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
17
Online
At a glance iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle features and options Control Display
This chapter describes all standard, country- Hints

specific and optional features offered with the
▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the
series. It also describes features that are not
care instructions.
the selected options or country versions. This ▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
also applies to safety-related functions and Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
systems. The respectively applicable country be damaged.
provisions must be observed when using the ▷ In the case of very high temperatures on
respective features and systems. the Control Display, e.g. due to intense so‐
lar radiation, the brightness may be re‐
duced down to complete deactivation.
The concept Once the temperature is reduced, e.g.
through shadow or climate control system,
The iDrive combines the functions of many the normal functions are re-established.
switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐
ated from a central location.
Switching on
Using the iDrive during a trip 1. Switch on the ignition.
To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐ 2. Press the controller.
ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's
occupants and to other traffic, never attempt Switch off
to use the controls or enter information unless
traffic and road conditions allow it.◀ 1. Press button.
2. "Turn off control display"
Control elements at a glance

Control elements
Controller with navigation system

The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
1 Control Display menu items and enter the settings.
2 Controller with buttons and, depending on Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the equipment version, with touchpad the touchpad on the controller.
I
nformat i
onProvidedby:
18
Online
iDrive At a glance
1. Turn. Press button Function
BACK Displays the previous panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
Controller without navigation system

The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
1. Turn.
2. Press.
2. Press.
3. Move in four directions.
3. Move in two directions.

Buttons on controller
Press button Function
MENU Open the main menu.
RADIO Opens the Radio menu.
MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu.
NAV Opens the Navigation menu.
TEL Opens the phone menu.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
19
Online
At a glance iDrive
Buttons on controller Selecting menu items

Highlighted menu items can be selected.
Press button Function
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
MENU Open the main menu. item is highlighted.
Audio Open audio menu last listened
to, switch between audio me‐
nus.
TEL Opens the phone menu.
BACK Open previous panel.
OPTION Opens the Options menu.
2. Press the controller.

Operating concept
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
Opening the main menu In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
Press button. selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.,
"Settings".
Changing between panels

After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a
new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.
▷ Move the controller to the left.
Closes current display and shows previous
display.
Reopens previous display by pressing
BACK button. In this case, the current
The main menu is displayed. panel is not closed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the ▷ Move the controller to the right.
main menu.
Opens new display on top of previous
screen.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
20
Online
iDrive At a glance
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐ 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
cate that additional panels can be opened. is displayed.
Display of an opened menu

When selecting a menu, it generally opens with
the panel that was last selected in that menu.
To display the first panel of a menu:
▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly
until the first panel is displayed.
▷ Press the menu button on the controller
twice.
Opening the Options menu
Press button.
Activating/deactivating the functions
Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
The "Options" menu is displayed. box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐
vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item
activates or deactivates the function.
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Touchpad
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller:
Additional options: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is Selecting functions
displayed. 1. "Settings"
2. "Touchpad"
Options menu
3. Select the desired function.
The "Options" menu consists of various areas:
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".
▷ "Interactive map": viewing the interac‐
This area remains unchanged.
tive map.
▷ Control options for the selected main
▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses.
menu, e.g., for "Radio".
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
▷ If applicable, further operating options for
letters and numbers.
the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".
Entering letters and numbers

Changing settings
Entering letters requires some practice at the
1. Select a field.
beginning. When entering, pay attention to the
following:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
21
Online
At a glance iDrive
▷ For the input of upper/lower case letters Example: setting the clock
and numbers, it may be necessary to reel
via the controller to the corresponding In‐ Setting the clock
put mode, refer to page 25, e.g. when the
On the Control Display:
spelling of upper and lower case letters is
identical.
1. Press button. The main menu is dis‐
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
played.
the Control Display.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐
▷ Always enter associated characters, such
lighted, and then press the controller.
as accents or periods so that the letter can
be clearly recognized. Possible input de‐
pends on the set language. Where neces‐
sary, enter special characters via the con‐
troller.
▷ To delete a character, slide to the left on
the touchpad.
▷ To enter a blank space, slide to the right in
the center of the touchpad.
▷ To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in the
3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
upper area of the touchpad.
to display "Time/Date".
▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right
4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
in the lower area of the touchpad.
highlighted, and then press the controller.
Using interactive map and Internet
Via touch-pad move the interactive map in the
navigation system and Internet sites.
Function Controls
Move interactive map or Swipe into re‐

Internet sites. spective direc‐
tion.
Enlarge/shrink interactive Drag in or out on

5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐
map or Internet sites. the touchpad with
lighted, and then press the controller.
fingers.
Display the menu or open Tap once.

a link in the Internet.
Changing settings
You may change control display settings via
touchpad. Swipe left or right accordingly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
22
Online
iDrive At a glance
6. Turn the controller to set the hours and Symbol Meaning

press the controller.
Text message was received.
7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller. Check the SIM card.
SIM card is blocked.

Status information SIM card is missing.
Status field Enter PIN.

The following information is displayed in the
status field at the top right: Entertainment symbols
▷ Time.
Symbol Meaning
▷ Current entertainment source.
▷ Sound output, on/off. CD/DVD player.
▷ Wireless network reception strength. Music collection.
▷ Phone status.
Gracenote® database.
▷ Traffic bulletin reception.
AUX-IN port.
Status field symbols USB audio interface.
The symbols are grouped as follows.
Mobile phone audio interface.
Radio symbols
Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning
Symbol Meaning
HD Radio station is being received.
Spoken instructions are turned off.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Telephone symbols
Split screen
Symbol Meaning
General information
Incoming or outgoing call. Additional information can be displayed on the
Missed call. right side of the split screen, e.g., information
from the on-board comupter.
Wireless network reception In the divided screen view, the so-called split
strength. screen, this information remains visible even
Symbol flashes: network search. when you change to another menu.
Wireless network is not available.
Bluetooth is switched on.
Roaming is active.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
23
Online
At a glance iDrive
Switching the split screen on and off Without navigation system and
On the Control Display: telephone
Only radio stations can be stored on the but‐
1. Press button. tons, refer to user's manual for Navigation, En‐
tertainment, Communication.
2. "Split screen"
Saving a function
Selecting the display
1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2. Press and hold the desired button,
1. Press button. until a signal sounds.
2. "Split screen"
3. Move the controller until the split screen is Running a function
selected. Press button.
4. Press the controller or select "Split screen The function will work immediately.
content". This means, e.g., that the number is dialed
5. Select the desired menu item. when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the button assignment

Touch buttons with bare fingers. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at top edge of
screen.
Programmable memory
buttons
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ Deleting the button assignments
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
tions, phone numbers and menu entries.
approx. five seconds.
Settings are stored for the profile currently in
2. "OK"
use.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
24
Online
iDrive At a glance
Deleting personal in the Entering letters and numbers

vehicle
General information
The concept On the Control Display:
Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves 1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
personal data, such as stored radio stations. bers.
These personal data can be permanently de‐
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
leted through iDrive.
needed.
General information 3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted: Symbol Function
▷ Personal Profile settings. Press the controller: delete the let‐

▷ Stored radio stations. ter or number.
▷ Stored Favorites buttons. Press the controller for an extended

▷ Travel and computer information. period: delete all letters or numbers.
▷ Music collection.
▷ Navigation, e.g. stored destinations. Switching between cases, letters and
numbers
▷ Phone book.
Depending on the menu, you can reel between
▷ Online data, e.g. Favorites, cookies. entering upper and lower case, letters and
▷ Voice notes. numbers:
▷ Login accounts. Symbol Function
▷ RemoteApp smartphone tethering.
Enter the letters.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
to 30 minutes. Enter the numbers.
or Tip controller up.

Functional requirement
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Without navigation system
Deleting data Select the symbol.
Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐
trol Display. Entry comparison
Entering names and addresses: choice is nar‐
1. Switch on the ignition.
rowed down with every letter entered and let‐
2. "Settings" ters may be added automatically.
3. Open "Options". Entries are continuously compared with data
4. "Delete personal data" stored in the vehicle.
5. "Continue" ▷ Only those letters are offered during input
for which data is available.
6. "OK"
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
25
Online
At a glance iDrive
▷ Target search: names of locations may be

entered in languages available through
Control Display.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
26
Online
Voice activation system At a glance
Voice activation system

Vehicle features and options Using voice activation
This chapter describes all standard, country-
Activating the voice activation system
1. Press button on the steering
wheel.
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and 2. Wait for the signal.
systems. The respectively applicable country 3. Say the command.
provisions must be observed when using the A command that is recognized by the voice
respective features and systems. activation system is announced and dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
The concept cates that the voice activation system is active.
▷ Most functions displayed on the Control If no other commands are available, use func‐
Display can be operated by voice com‐ tion via iDrive.
mands via the voice activation system. The
system supports you with announcements Terminating the voice activation
during input. system
▷ Functions that can only be used when the Briefly press the button on the steer‐
vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the ing wheel or ›Cancel‹.
voice activation system.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's
Possible commands
Manual to use with the voice activation Most menu items on the Control Display can
system. be voiced as commands.
The available commands depend on the menu
that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐
Requirements play.
Via the Control Display, set a language that is There are short commands for many functions.
also supported by the voice activation system You may select lists such as phone lists via
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐ voice activation. Read these lists out loud ex‐
fied. actly as they show in the respective list.
Set the language, refer to page 92.
Having possible commands read aloud
You can have available commands read out
loud for you: ›Voice commands‹
E. g. if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the
commands for the settings are read out loud.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovidedby:
27
Online
At a glance Voice activation system
Executing functions using short

commands 2. Press button on the steering
wheel.
Execute functions on the main menu via short
commands. It almost doesn't matter which 3. ›Tone‹
menu item is selected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹.
List of short commands for the voice activation
system, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ Setting the voice dialog
munication Owner's Manual. Set system to standard dialog or use a short
version.
Help dialog for the voice activation The short version of the voice dialog plays
system back short messages in abbreviated form.
Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹
1. "Settings"
Additional commands for the help dialog:
2. "Language/Units"
▷ ›Help with examples‹: announces informa‐
tion about the current operating options 3. "Speech type:"
and the most important commands for 4. Select setting.
them.
▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information
about the principle of operation for the
voice activation system is announced.
One example: open the tone

settings
Via the main menu
The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the controller. Adjusting the volume
1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if Turn the volume button while giving an in‐
needed. struction until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
2. Press button on the steering volume of other audio sources is changed.
wheel. ▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐
3. ›Radio‹ rently in use.
4. ›Tone‹
Via short command Hints on Emergency

The desired tone settings can also be started Requests
via a short command. Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
needed. tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
28
Online
Voice activation system At a glance
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐

ment of a phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 204, close to the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and convertible
top closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
29
Online
At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Vehicle features and options Select components
This chapter describes all standard, country- 1. Press button.

2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle info".
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to 3. Press the controller.
the selected options or country versions. This 4. Selecting desired range:
also applies to safety-related functions and ▷ "Quick reference"
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the ▷ "Search by pictures"
respective features and systems. ▷ "Owner's Manual"
Integrated Owner's Manual

in the vehicle
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played on the Control Display. It specifically
describes features and functions found in the
vehicle.
Components of the Integrated

Leafing through the Owner's Manual
Owner's Manual
The Integrated Owner's Manual consists of Page by page with link access
three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐
Turn the controller until the next or previous
mation or possible access.
page is displayed.
Quick Reference Guide
Page by page without link access
The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐
Scroll through the pages directly while skip‐
tion how to operate the car, how to use basic
ping the links.
vehicle functions or what to do in case of a
breakdown. This information can also be dis‐ Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press
played while driving. the controller to browse from page to page.
Scroll back.
Search by images
Image search provides information and de‐
scriptions. This is helpful when the terminol‐ Scroll forward.
ogy for a feature is not at hand.
Owner's Manual
Search for information and descriptions by en‐
tering terms selected from the index.
Informat i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
30
Online
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance
Context help - Owner's Manual to the Programmable memory buttons

temporarily selected function
You may open the relevant information di‐ General information
rectly. The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐
grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
Opening via the iDrive rectly.
To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the Options menu: Storing
1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive.
1. Press button or move the controller
to the right repeatedly until the "Options" 2. Press selected button for more
menu is displayed. than 2 seconds.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
Executing
Opening when a Check Control Press button.
message is displayed The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐
Directly from the Check Control message on mediately.
the Control Display:
"Display Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the

Owner's Manual
To reel from a function, e. g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
alternate between the two displays:
1. Press button or move the controller

to the right repeatedly until the "Options"
menu is displayed.
2. "Display Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4. Press button again to return to last

displayed function.
5. Press button to return to the page of

the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate permanently between the last dis‐
played function and the Owner's Manual re‐
peat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every
time.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
31
Online
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Online
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of
your vehicle. All features and accessories that
are useful for driving and your safety, comfort
and convenience are described here.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Online
Controls Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options Overview

provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
Remote control/key 3 Unlocking the trunk lid
General information 4 Panic mode

The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with integrated key. Integrated key
Every remote control holds a replaceable bat‐
tery.
You may set the key functions depending on
the optional features and country-specific ver‐
sion. For Settings, refer to page 43.
The vehicle stores personal settings for every
remote control. Personal Profile, refer to
page 35.
The remote controls hold information on re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐ Press button, arrow 1, and remove the key, ar‐
mote control, refer to page 193 row 2.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
▷ Driver's door.
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side.
The front passenger glove compartment con‐

tains a switch for separately securing the trunk
lid, refer to page 41.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
34
Online
Opening and closing Controls
Replacing the battery ▷ Interference of radio transmission by

charger while charging items such as mo‐
bile devices in the vehicle.
A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐
tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start
the engine.
Starting the engine with emergency

detection of the remote control
1. Remove integrated key from remote con‐

trol.
2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1.
3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐
ment, arrow 2.
4. Insert a battery of the same type with the
positive side facing up.
5. Press the cover closed. Steptronic transmission: if a corresponding
Take the used battery to a recycling Check Control message appears, hold the re‐
center or to your service center. mote control, as shown, against the marked
area on the steering column and press the
Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while
New remote controls pressing the brake.
New remote controls are available from the Manual transmission: if a corresponding Check
service center. Control message appears, hold the remote
control, as shown, against the marked area on
Loss of the remote controls the steering column and press the Start/Stop
Lost remote controls can be disabled by your button within 10 seconds while pressing the
service center. clutch pedal.
If the remote control is not recognized: slightly
Emergency detection of remote change the height position of the remote con‐
control trol and repeat the procedure.
It is possible to switch on the ignition or start
the engine in situations such as the following:
▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐ Personal Profile
mote control by external sources e.g., by
radio masts. The concept
▷ Empty battery in remote control. Personal Profile provides three profiles, using
▷ Interference from radio transmissions which personal vehicle settings can be stored.
through mobile devices in close proximity Every remote control has one of these profiles
to remote control. assigned.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovtrol,
ided the
by:assigned personal profile will be acti‐
35
Online
vated. All settings stored in the profile are au‐ Profile management
tomatically applied.
If several drivers use their own remote control, Opening profiles
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings Regardless of the remote control in use a dif‐
during unlocking. These settings are also re‐ ferent profile may be activated.
stored, if the vehicle has been used in the
1. "Settings"
meantime by a person with a different remote
control. 2. "Profiles"
Changes to the settings are automatically 3. Select a profile.
saved in the personal profile. ▷ All settings stored in the called-up profile
Three personal profiles and a guest profile can are automatically applied.
be created. ▷ The called-up profile is assigned to the re‐
mote control being used at the time.
Adjusting ▷ If the profile is already assigned to a differ‐
The settings for the following systems and ent remote control, this profile will apply to
functions are saved in the active profile. The both remote controls. It cannot be differen‐
scope of storable settings is country- and tiated anymore between the settings for
equipment-dependable. the two remote controls.
▷ Unlocking and locking.
▷ Lights.
Renaming profiles
A personal name can be assigned to every pro‐
▷ Climate control.
file to avoid confusion between the profiles.
▷ Radio.
1. "Settings"
▷ Instrument cluster.
2. "Profiles"
▷ Programmable memory buttons.
3. "Options"
▷ Volumes, tone.
4. "Rename current profile"
▷ Control Display.
▷ Navigation. Resetting profiles
▷ Park Distance Control PDC. The settings of the active profile are reset to
▷ Rearview camera their default values.
▷ Driving Dynamics Control. 1. "Settings"
▷ Driver's seat position, exterior mirror posi‐ 2. "Profiles"
tion, steering wheel position.
3. "Options"
▷ Cruise control.
4. "Reset current profile"
▷ Intelligent Safety.
Exporting profiles
Most settings of the active profile can be ex‐
ported.
This can be helpful for securing and retrieving
personal settings, before delivering the vehicle
to a workshop, e.g. Profiles can be taken to an‐
I
nfor
mat
ionProvidedby:
36
Online
other vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro‐ Display profile list during start
file function. The profile list can be displayed during each
The following export options are available: start to select the desired profile.
▷ Via BMW Online. 1. "Settings"
▷ Via the USB port to a USB device. 2. "Profiles"
Popular file systems for USB devices are 3. "Options"
supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the rec‐
4. "Display user list at startup"
ommended formats for profile export.
Other formats may not support the export.
1. "Settings"
Using the remote control
2. "Profiles"
3. "Export profile" Note
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online" Take the remote control with you
USB interface: "USB device" People or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐
Importing profiles side. Always take the remote control with you
Profiles exported via BMW Online can also be when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle
imported via BMW Online. can then be opened from the outside.◀
Profiles stored on a USB device can be im‐
ported via the USB interface. Unlocking
Existing settings are overwritten with the im‐ Press button on the remote control.
ported profile.
1. "Settings" ▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap
are being unlocked.
2. "Profiles"
▷ Interior lamps and courtesy lamps are acti‐
3. "Import profile" vated. This function is not available, if the
4. BMW Online: "BMW Online" interior lamps were switched off manually.
USB interface: "USB device" ▷ The welcome lamps are switched on, if this
function was activated.
Using the guest profile ▷ Exterior mirrors folded through convenient
The guest profile is for individual settings that closing are folded open.
are saved in none of the three personal pro‐ You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
files. For Settings, refer to page 43.
This can be useful for drivers who are using The alarm system, refer to page 44, is dis‐
the vehicle temporarily and do not have their armed.
own profile.
1. "Settings" Convenient opening

2. "Profiles" Press and hold this button on the re‐
3. "Guest" mote control.
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not

I
nfor
assigned to the current remote control. mat i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
37
Online
The windows are opened, as long as the but‐ Releasing the button or leaving the vicinity of
ton on the remote control is pressed. the vehicle stops the motion.
With Comfort Access, the remote control can In this case, the convertible top and convertible
be used to open the convertible top when in top well storage cover will slowly lower after a
the vicinity of the vehicle. short period of time. The convertible top and
the convertible top well storage cover are not
Press and hold this button on the re‐
locked. Press button again until the convertible
mote control until the convertible top
top operation is completed.
is fully opened and the convertible top well
storage cover is fully closed. The exterior mirrors are folded in.
Danger of jamming The exterior mirrors are not folded in when the
warning flashers are activated.
Monitor the opening process to ensure
that no one becomes trapped; otherwise, inju‐ Monitor closing
ries may result.◀ Monitor closing to ensure that no one
becomes trapped.◀
Leaving the vicinity of the vehicle stops the
motion.
In this case, the convertible top and convertible
Switching on interior lights and
top well storage cover will slowly lower after a
courtesy lights
short period of time. The convertible top and Press button on the remote control with
the convertible top well storage cover are not the vehicle locked.
locked. Press button again until the convertible
top operation is completed. This function is not available, if the interior
lamps were switched off manually.
Locking If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐
onds after vehicle was locked, the interior mo‐
Locking from the outside
tion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti-
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside theft warning system, refer to page 45, are
with people inside the car, as the vehicle can‐ turned off. After locking, wait 10 seconds be‐
not be unlocked from inside without special fore pressing the button again.
knowledge.◀
The driver's door must be closed. Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find
Press button on the remote control.
yourself in a dangerous situation.
All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap are Press button on the remote control for
being locked. at least 3 seconds.
The alarm system, refer to page 44, is armed. To reel off the alarm: press any button.
Convenient closing Unlocking the trunk lid

With Comfort Access, the convertible top and
Press button on the remote control for
the window can be closed in the vicinity of the
approx. 1 second.
vehicle.
Hold down the remote control button un‐
til the closing operation is completed.
Informat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
38
Online
The trunk lid opens slightly, regardless of ▷ LX8766S.

whether the vehicle was previously locked or ▷ LX8766E.
unlocked.
▷ LX8CAS.
Depending on the features and the country
▷ LX8CAS2.
version, it is also possible to have door un‐
locked. Create the settings, refer to page 43. ▷ MYTCAS4.
If the doors were not unlocked, the trunk lid is Compliance statement:
locked again as soon as it closes. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Do not place the remote control in the Rules. Operation is subject to the following
cargo area two conditions:
Take the remote control with you and do not ▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ ference, and
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when ▷ this device must accept any interference
the trunk lid is closed.◀ received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Malfunction Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
Remote control detection by the vehicle can these devices could void the user's authority to
among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐ operate this equipment.
lowing circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to
Without remote control
page 35.
From the outside
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment Locking from the outside
with high transmit power. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to with people inside the car, as the vehicle can‐
metal objects. not be unlocked from inside without special
knowledge.◀
mobile phones or other electronic devices Remove the key before pulling the door
in direct proximity. handle
Do not transport the remote control together Before pulling the outside door handle, remove
with metal objects or electronic devices. the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also the key.◀
be unlocked and locked from the outside with‐
out remote control, refer to page 39.
For US owners only

The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
39
Online
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is

automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights come on.
Unlocking and opening
Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door

lock using the integrated key, refer to page 34.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
Alarm system ▷ Press the central locking system button to

The alarm system is not armed if the vehicle is unlock the doors together, and then pull
locked with the integrated key. the door handle above the armrest.
The alarm system is triggered when the door is ▷ On the door to be opened, pull the door
opened, if the vehicle was unlocked via the handle twice: the first time unlocks the
door lock. door, the second time opens it. The other
doors remain locked.
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle
with the remote control or switch on the igni‐
tion, if needed, through emergency detection
of the remote control, refer to page 35. Trunk lid
From the inside Opening

During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
Unlocking and locking up.
Ensure that adequate clearance is available
before opening.
Opening from the outside
Pressing the central locking system button

locks or unlocks the vehicle with the doors
closed.
The vehicle is not secured against theft when

▷ Press button on the trunk lid.
locking.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
40
Online
▷ Press button on the remote con‐ Locking separately

trol for approx. 1 second. The trunk lid can be locked separately with the
As the case may be, the doors are also un‐ switch in the glove compartment. If the glove
locked. Unlocking with the remote control, compartment is locked, the trunk lid cannot be
refer to page 38. opened.
The trunk lid is unlocked and can be swung ▷ Trunk lid secured, arrow 1.
upward.
▷ Trunk lid not secured, ar‐
The trunk lid cannot be opened if the row 2.
convertible top is not fully opened or closed.
Opening from the inside Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This
With the vehicle is stationary, press secures the trunk lid and disconnects it from
the button in the driver's footwell. the central locking system.
This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked
The trunk lid is unlocked and opens slightly. using valet service. The infrared remote con‐
trol can be handed out without the key.
Closing
Emergency unlocking
Hints
Keep the closing path clear
Make sure that the closing path of the
trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐
sult.◀
Do not place the remote control in the

cargo area
Take the remote control with you and do not
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when
The trunk lid unlocks.
the trunk lid is closed.◀
Closing
Comfort Access
The concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
trol with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the
Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunk car's interior.
lid make it easier to pull down the lid.
I
nf or
mat i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
41
Online
Comfort Access supports the following func‐ Locking

tions:
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Unlocking of the trunk lid separately.
▷ Start the engine.
Functional requirements
▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐
ence nearby.
▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
Touch the surface on the door handle of the
must be located outside of the vehicle.
driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not your finger for approx. 1 second without grasp‐
possible until after approx. 2 seconds. ing the door handle.
▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐ This corresponds with pressing the button on
mote control is in the vehicle. the remote control.
To save battery power, ensure that the ignition
Unlocking and all electronic systems and/or power con‐
sumers are turned off before locking the vehi‐
cle.
Convenient closing
Monitor closing
Monitor closing to ensure that no one
becomes trapped.◀
Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front

passenger door completely, arrow.
This corresponds with pressing the button on
the remote control.
Touch the surface on the door handle of the

driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with
your finger and hold it there without grasping
the door handle.
This corresponds to pressing and holding
the remote control button.
In addition to locking, the exterior mirrors fold

I
nfor
mat
i in.
onProvidedby:
42
Online
Separately unlocking the trunk lid Doors

Press button on the exterior of the trunk lid. 1. "Settings"
This corresponds to pressing the re‐ 2. "Doors/key"
mote control button. 3. Select the symbol.
The situation of the doors does not change. 4. Select the desired function:
Do not place the remote control in the ▷ "Driver's door only"
cargo area Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
Take the remote control with you and do not flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐
leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ locks the entire vehicle.
mote control is locked inside the vehicle when ▷ "All doors"
the trunk lid is closed.◀
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
Malfunction Trunk lid

Remote control detection by the vehicle can Depending on optional features and country
among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐ version, this setting is not offered in some
lowing circumstances: cases.
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to 1. "Settings"
page 35. 2. "Doors/key"
▷ Interference of the radio connection from 3. Select the symbol.
transmission towers or other equipment 4. Select the desired function:
with high transmit power.
▷ "Tailgate"
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
The trunk lid unlocks.
metal objects.
▷ "Tailgate + door(s)"
mobile phones or other electronic devices The trunk lid and the doors are un‐
in direct proximity. locked.
Do not transport the remote control together
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
with metal objects or electronic devices.
The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
fer to page 35.
the vehicle using the buttons of the remote
control or using the integrated key, refer to 1. "Settings"
page 39. 2. "Doors/key"
3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐
mation signals.
Adjusting
▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock"
Unlocking ▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"
fer to page 35.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
43
Online
Automatic locking Alarm system

fer to page 35. The concept
1. "Settings" When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system responds to:
2. "Doors/key"
▷ Opening a door, the hood or the trunk lid.
3. Select the desired function:
▷ Movements in the interior.
▷ "Lock if no door is opened"
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐
The vehicle locks automatically after a
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing
short period of time if no door is
the car.
opened.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
▷ "Lock after start driving"
The alarm system briefly signals tampering:
The vehicle locks automatically after
you drive off. ▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
Retrieving the seat and mirror settings tem.
The driver's seat and exterior mirror positions ▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.
used last are stored for the remote control cur‐
rently in use. Arming and disarming the alarm
When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions system
are automatically retrieved if this function was When you unlock or lock the vehicle, either
activated. with the remote control or via the Comfort Ac‐
cess, the alarm system is disarmed or armed at
Pinch hazard when moving back the seat
the same time.
If this function is used, first make sure
that the footwell behind the driver's seat is Door lock and armed alarm system
empty. Otherwise, people might get injured or
The alarm system is triggered when the door is
objects damaged when the seat is moved
opened, when the vehicle is unlocked via the
back.◀
door lock.
The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
▷ When a seat position switch is pressed. Trunk lid and armed alarm system
▷ When a button of the seat and mirror mem‐ The trunk lid can be opened even when the
ory is pressed. alarm system is armed.
After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and
Activating the setting monitored again when the doors are locked.
1. "Settings" The hazard warning system flashes once.
2. "Doors/key"
Panic mode
3. "Last seat position autom."
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control for
at least 3 seconds.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
44
Online
To switch off the alarm: press any button. Interior motion sensor
The interior is monitored to the height of the
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview seats. The alarm system is armed together
mirror with the interior motion sensor even when the
convertible top is open. Falling objects such as
leaves can trigger the alarm unintentionally.
The windows must be closed for the system to
function properly.
Avoiding unintentional alarms

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor can be switched off together, such as in
the following situations:
▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every ▷ In automatic car washes.
2 seconds:
▷ In duplex garages.
The system is armed.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking: cles, at sea or on a trailer.
The doors, hood or trunk lid is not closed ▷ With animals in the vehicle.
properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐
cured. Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp interior motion sensor
flashes continuously. Interior motion sen‐
Press the remote control button again
sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active.
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
When the still open access is closed, inte‐ is locked.
rior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
be switched on.
onds and then continues to flash.
▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
ing:
sor are turned off, until the vehicle is locked
The vehicle has not been tampered with. again.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the engine ignition is switched on, but Switching off the alarm
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
▷ Unlock vehicle with the remote control or
An alarm has been triggered. switch on the ignition, if needed through
emergency detection of remote control, re‐
Tilt alarm sensor fer to page 35.
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. ▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying
The alarm system responds in situations such the remote control on your person, grasp
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is the driver side or front passenger side door
towed. handle completely.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
45
Online
Power windows Closing individually

Keep the closing path clear
Hint
Monitor closing and make sure that the
Take the remote control with you closing path of the window is clear; otherwise,
Take the remote control with you when injuries may result.◀
leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐
not operate the power windows and injure ▷ Pull the switch to the resistance
themselves.◀ point.
The window closes while the switch is
held.
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance

point.
The front windows close automatically.
Pulling again stops the motion. The rear
windows close, as long as the switch is
pressed.
See also: Convenient closing, refer to page 38,
Opening individually via remote control.
▷ Press the button to the resistance Closing together

point.
Pull the switch to or beyond the resist‐
The window opens while the switch is held. ance point.
All windows are closed while the switch is be‐
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ing held.
ance point.
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stopse the motion. Pinch protection system
See also: Convenient opening, refer to Danger of jamming even with pinch pro‐
page 37, via remote control. tection
Even with the pinch protection system, check
Opening together that the window's closing path is clear; other‐
wise, the closing action may not stop in certain
▷ Press the button to the resistance situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀
point.
No window accessories
All windows open while the switch is being
held. Do not install any accessories in the win‐
dow's range of movement; otherwise, the
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐ pinch protection system will be impaired.◀
ance point. If closing force exceeds a specific margin as a
All windows open automatically. window closes, closing is interrupted.
Pressing again stops the motion. The window reopens slightly.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovidedby:
46
Online
Closing without the pinch protection air via the automatic climate control so that
system no vacuum is produced in the vehicle.
Keep the closing path clear ▷ It is not possible to start the engine and
operate the convertible top simultane‐
Monitor closing and make sure that the
ously. When the engine is started using the
closing path of the window is clear; otherwise,
Start/Stop button or using the Auto Start/
injuries may result.◀
Stop function, the convertible top move‐
E.g. danger from the outside or ice might pre‐ ment is briefly interrupted.
vent window from closing properly - proceed
as follows: Overview
1. Pull the reel past the resistance point and
hold it there.
The pinch protection is limited and the
window reopens slightly if the closing force
exceeds a certain margin.
2. Pull the reel past the resistance point again
within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there.
The window closes without jam protection.
Convertible top switch

Convertible top
Functional requirements
General information
The ignition or radio-ready state must be
The convertible top can be opened or closed
switched on.
at speeds up to approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The following requirements must be fulfilled in
If the vehicle is accelerated above a speed of
order to be able to move the convertible top.
approx. 30 mph/50 km/h while the convertible
top is being moved, the convertible top move‐ ▷ The trunk partition is flipped down.
ment stops. ▷ The trunk lid is closed.
▷ The external temperature is above
Hints 14 ℉/-10 ℃.
▷ The trunk lid cannot be opened if the ▷ The voltage of the vehicle electrical system
convertible top is not fully opened or is sufficient.
closed.
▷ The convertible top drive is not overheat‐
▷ If possible, close the convertible top when ing.
the vehicle is parked. A closed convertible
▷ The vehicle speed is not too high.
top protects it from weather-related dam‐
age and to some extent from theft. ▷ The windows can be lowered.
▷ Event when the convertible top is closed, If this requirement is not met, a check control
only store valuables in the locked trunk. message is displayed.
▷ At higher speeds, vacuum produced in the
vehicle interior causes the convertible top
to begin to flutter. Increase the I
amount
nfor
mat
of
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
47
Online
Safety information Keep children away from the opening path of

the convertible top, otherwise, there is a risk of
Do not open convertible top at low tem‐
injury.◀
peratures
With temperatures below +14 ℉/-10 ℃ do not Observe traffic during operation
open the convertible top; otherwise damages When the convertible top is opened while
could result.◀ driving, be alert to traffic; otherwise, it may re‐
sult in an accident. If possible, do not move the
Allow wet convertible top to dry
convertible top while driving in reverse be‐
Do not leave the open convertible top in cause rearward vision is severely impaired
the convertible top well longer than one day while the convertible top is in motion. During
while the top is still wet; otherwise, damage windy conditions, do not operate the
could result due to moisture.◀ convertible top while driving.
Note the swivel range of the convertible Do not drive faster than 30 mph/50 km/h; oth‐
top erwise, vehicle damage may occur.◀
The convertible top pivots up during opening Do not attach any roof carrier systems to
and closing. When the top is moved, e.g., in the convertible top
garages, make sure that there is a minimum
Do not attach any roof carrier systems; other‐
height of 79 inches/2 meters; otherwise, it
wise, an accident may occur.◀
damages may result.◀
Do not operate convertible top on un‐
Do not place objects on the convertible
even sections or road
top
Do not open or close convertible top on un‐
Do not place any objects on the convertible
even sections of road. Otherwise, the vibra‐
top, otherwise, they could fall and cause dam‐
tions can result in damage to the convertible
age or injuries.◀
top.◀
No convertible top movement when roll‐
over protection is activated Before opening and closing
Do not move the convertible top when rollover ▷ Follow the safety instructions for the
protection is activated; otherwise, it may result convertible top.
in damage to the convertible top.◀ ▷ Make sure that the trunk partition in the
Open and close convertible top com‐ trunk is folded down.
pletely ▷ Make sure that the cargo does not push
Always open or close the convertible top com‐ against the trunk partition from below.
pletely. Convertible top and convertible top ▷ Make sure that the trunk lid is closed.
well storage cover are locked in the final posi‐
tions. Driving with the convertible top or Opening and closing from the inside
convertible top well storage cover unlocked In order to protect the battery, move the
can result in damage.◀ convertible top only when the engine is run‐
ning if possible.
Do not reach into the convertible top
mechanism Before closing the convertible top, remove any
foreign objects from the windshield frame; oth‐
Do not reach into the convertible top mecha‐
erwise, closing may be prevented.
nism during the opening and closing operation.
I
nfor
mati onProvidedby:
48
Online
▷ Press and hold the switch. The ▷ Convenient opening, refer to page 37, via
windows are rolled down, and the the remote control.
convertible top opens as longs as the ▷ Convenient closing, refer to page 38, via
switch is pressed. the remote control.
▷ Pull the switch and hold it. The
windows are lowered, the Cargo area partition
convertible top closes and the windows are
raised again as long as the switch is pulled.
Push or pull switch until the convertible top is
completely open or closed and the end of the
procedure is indicated by a corresponding
Check Control message. Always make sure
that the convertible top well storage cover is
completely closed. If the convertible top is
completely open or closed, convertible top and
convertible top well storage cover are latched.
Fold down cargo area partition in the back so
that the convertible top can be opened.
Interruption
Fold down cargo area partition in the front in
Always open/close the convertible top order to enlarge the cargo area capacity when
completely the convertible top is closed.
A convertible top that is not opened or closed
completely is not locked and represents a haz‐ Manually close convertible top
ard.◀
The convertible top movement is interrupted if
Hints
the switch is released. The sequence can be If there is a defect, the convertible top can be
continued in the desired direction using the manually closed. Two persons are necessary
switch. to do this.
If there is a longer interruption with the ignition Do not manually open convertible top
switched on, convertible top and convertible and close it manually only in emergency
top well storage cover remain approx. 10 mi‐ situations.
nutes in the current position before they slowly Do not manually open the convertible top. The
go down. If the ignition is switched off, convertible top well storage cover cannot latch
convertible top and convertible top well stor‐ if there is an electrical malfunction and would
age cover lower already after a short waiting open while driving.
period.
Manually close the convertible top only in
The convertible top and the convertible top emergency situations.
well storage cover are not locked. Operate
Damage can result from improper handling.◀
switch again until the convertible operation is
terminated.
Before closing
Convenient operation from outside 1. Lower the windows completely.
When equipped with Comfort Access the 2. Switch off the ignition.
convertible top can also be operated from out‐
side. I
nf ormati
onProvidedby:
49
Online
3. Carefully open the trunk lid, refer to ing both hands, and swing it slightly up‐
page 40, taking care not to damage the ward.
convertible top well storage cover.
4. Remove the two large lids from the trim. If
needed, use the screwdriver from the on‐
board vehicle tool kit.
2. Before further opening the convertible top

well storage cover, secure the hook, arrow.
Insert the screwdriver from the outside into
the hook and hold it in place during further
5. Unlock convertible top well storage cover. opening.
Pull on the right lid, until the convertible
top well storage cover opens on the right
side.
Proceed accordingly on the left side.
6. When the convertible top is closed man‐
ually, the trunk lid can no longer be
opened.
Remove urgently needed items from the
trunk and close the trunk lid.
3. Open the convertible top well storage
You need the screwdriver and Allen
cover completely. Make sure that the
wrench from the onboard vehicle tool kit.
hinge, arrow, remains slightly forward bent.
Lifting out convertible top

Only close the convertible top with two
people
Carry out the following steps with the aid of a
second person and with the doors open; other‐
wise, it may result in damage to the convertible
top.◀
1. Grasp the sheet metal of the convertible

top well storage cover from the outside us‐ 4. Lift the convertible top out on the front on
both sides, and swing it forward. Keep the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
50
Online
convertible top well storage cover open, top frame must be locked in the windshield
e.g., with your shoulder. frame.
The rear convertible top frame is automati‐
cally pressed onto the convertible top well
storage cover.
5. Place the rear convertible top frame verti‐

cally, close the convertible top well storage
cover, and press it down as far as possible
on both sides. Next, place the rear 3. Have the convertible top checked by the
convertible top frame onto the convertible service center.
top well storage cover.
Wind deflector
The concept
The wind deflector reduces the air movement
in the vehicle interior when driving with the
convertible top down.
Installation
The wind deflector is located in a protective
Lock convertible cover jacket in the trunk.
1. Carefully remove the cover in the center of
1. Take the wind deflector out of the protec‐
the front convertible top frame. If needed,
tive jacket.
use the screwdriver.
Fully extend the wind deflector.
2. While one person presses the center of

front convertible frame onto the windshield 2. Insert wind deflector from one side of the
frame: turn the Allen wrench counterclock‐ vehicle with the pins in the corresponding
wise up to the stop. The front convertible
I
nformat i
onProvidedby:
51
Online
fixing points on the opposite side of the ve‐ Do not tilt the front seat backrest too far
hicle. back
Do not tilt the front seat backrest too far back
with the wind deflector installed if the seat is to
be moved all the way back. Otherwise, the
wind deflector will be damaged.◀
Removing
Proceed in reverse sequence.
Luggage on the back seat

3. Press the wind deflector inwardly and up, In order to store luggage on the rear seat when
arrow 1, to the extent that the wind deflec‐ the wind deflector is installed, the outer frame
tor can be positioned in front of the fixing of the wind deflector is flipped up.
points on the installation side. In this wind deflector position, the rear seat
Press the wind deflector downward, while backrest can be folded down, e.g. to protect
inserting the pins in the corresponding fix‐ the upholstery against damage caused by
ing points, arrows 2. pieces of luggage.
1. Turn the release lever 90°, arrow 1, and

fold the outer frame forward, arrow 2.
4. To ensure safe latching, press the wind de‐

flector downward in the middle, arrows 1.
Grasp the inner framework of the wind de‐ 2. Place luggage on the rear seat. Make sure
flector on the recessed grip and fold it up, that the luggage does not project past the
arrow 2. fixing points for the wind deflector.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
52
Online
3. Fold wind deflector back and align it with

the fixing point on the opposite side of the
vehicle.
Turn release lever back by 45° in order to
extend the opposing pin.
4. Align wind deflector with the fixing point on
the installation side and turn back the re‐
lease lever another 45° in order to extend
the second pin.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
53
Online
Controls Adjusting
Adjusting
Vehicle features and options Keep the movement area unobstructed
When changing the seat position, keep
the seat's area of movement unobstructed;
otherwise, people might get injured or objects
damaged.◀
also applies to safety-related functions and Manually adjustable seats
provisions must be observed when using the At a glance
Sitting safely
The ideal seating position can make a vital
contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 58. 1 Forward/backward
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 59. 2 Thigh support
▷ Airbags, refer to page 99. 3 Seat tilt
4 Backrest width
Seats 5 Lumbar support
6 Height
Hints 7 Backrest tilt
Do not adjust the seat while driving
Do not adjust the driver's seat while driv‐
ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected Forward/backward
movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle
control could lead to an accident.◀
Do not incline the backrest too far to the

rear
Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear
while driving, or there is a risk of slipping under
the safety belt in the event of an accident. This
would eliminate the protection normally pro‐
vided by the belt.◀
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
I
nfor
mat
i direction.
onProvidedby:
54
Online
Adjusting Controls
After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐ to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat
ward or back slightly making sure it engages engages properly.
properly.
Electrically adjustable seats
Height
At a glance
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat

or lift it off, as necessary. 1 Seat and mirror memory
2 Backrest width
Backrest tilt 3 Lumbar support
4 Backrest tilt
5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
for the profile currently in use. When the vehi‐
cle is unlocked via the remote control, the po‐
sition is automatically retrieved if the Function,
refer to page 44, is activated for this purpose.
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Adjustments in detail
1. Forward/back.
Seat tilt
Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired

tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight
Inf
or mati
onProvi
dedby:
55
Online
Controls Adjusting
2. Height. Thigh support
3. Seat tilt. Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the switch.
4. Backrest tilt. The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch.
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Backrest width
Change the width of the back‐
rest using the side wings to ad‐
just the lateral support.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
56
Online
Adjusting Controls
Front seat heating Manual length adjustment
Comfort entry
The comfort entry contains a memory function
for forward/backward and backrest adjust‐
ment.
1. Pull lever up to the stop.
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the journey is continued within approx. 15 2. Fold backrest forward.
minutes, the seat heating is activated automat‐ 3. Push the seat forward.
ically with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO, refer to page 162, is acti‐ Original position
vated, the heater output is reduced. 1. Push the seat back into the original posi‐
tion.
Switch off 2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.
Press button longer.
Electric forward/backward adjustment
The LEDs go out.
Comfort entry
Entering the rear The comfort entry contains a memory function
for forward/backward and backrest adjust‐
Note ment.
Folding back and locking the backrest 1. Pull lever up to the stop.
Before driving off, fold back and lock the
backrests; otherwise, an unexpected seat
movement may cause an accident.◀
Keep the movement area unobstructed

When changing the seat position, keep
the seat's area of movement unobstructed;
damaged.◀
2. Fold backrest forward.

3. To change the entry area:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovidedby:
57
Online
Controls Adjusting
▷ Press and hold this button until Hints

the seat has moved to the de‐
One person per safety belt
sired position. Releasing the button
stops window/roof movement. Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or
▷ Press button briefly. The seat au‐
small children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀
tomatically moves to the end po‐
sition. Pressing again stops the motion. Putting on the belt
Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly
Original position
across the lap and shoulders, as close to the
1. Moving the seat to its original position: body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies
▷ Press and hold this button until low around the hips in the lap area and does
the seat has moved to its original not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt
position. Releasing the button stops can slip over the hips in a frontal impact and in‐
window/roof movement. jure the abdomen.
▷ Press button briefly. The seat The safety belt must not lie across the neck,
moves to its original position. rub on sharp edges, be routed over breakable
Pressing again stops the motion. objects, or be pinched.◀
2. Folding the backrest back. What reduces the restraining effect
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, and pull
the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the
Safety belts tension. Make sure that the belt is not jammed;
otherwise, the belt can be damaged and the
Seats with safety belt
restraining effect is reduced.◀
The vehicle has four seats, each of which is
equipped with a safety belt.
Buckling the belt
General information
Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving off.
For the occupants' safety the belt locking
mechanism triggers early. Slowly guide the
belt out of the holder when applying it.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point the belt buckle.
will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
Unbuckling the belt
1. Hold the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt back into its roll-up mecha‐
nism.
I
nfor
mat
ionProvidedby:
58
Online
Adjusting Controls
Safety belt reminder for driver's and Adjusting the height

passenger's seat
The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐
nal sounds. Make sure that the safety
belts are positioned correctly. The
safety belt reminder is active at speeds above
approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated
if objects are placed on the front passenger
seat.
Damage to safety belts ▷ To raise: push.

Wear and tear after accidents or when dam‐ ▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
aged otherwise: headrest down.
Have the safety belts, including the safety belt
tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors Removing
checked. Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
Check and replace safety belts sitting in the seat in question.
This should only be done by your service
center; otherwise, this safety feature might not
work properly.◀
Front headrests
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event 1. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐
of an accident. sistance.
Adjusting the head restraint 2. Press button, arrow 1, and pull the head re‐
straint out completely.
Adjust the head restraints of all occupied
seats properly; otherwise, there is an increased Before transporting passengers
risk of injury in an accident.◀ Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐
porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐
Height tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐
able.◀
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
Distance Rear head restraints

Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
is as close as possible to the back of the head. Removing
If necessary, adjust the distance by adjusting Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
the tilt of the backrest. sitting in the seat in question.
I
nformat i
onPr
ovidedby:
59
Online
Controls Adjusting
At a glance
Raise the head restraint beyond the resistance

point.
Before transporting passengers Storing
Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐ 1. Switch on the ignition.
porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐ 2. Set the desired position.
tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐
able.◀ 3. Press button. The LED in the but‐
ton lights up.
4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED
Seat and mirror memory is lit. The LED goes out.
If the SET button is pressed accidentally:
Hints
Press button again.
Do not retrieve the memory while driving
The LED goes out.
Do not retrieve the memory setting while
driving, as an unexpected movement of the
seat could result in an accident.◀ Calling up settings
Keep the movement area unobstructed Comfort function

When changing the seat position, keep 1. Open the driver's door.
the seat's area of movement unobstructed; 2. Switch off the ignition.
3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2.
damaged.◀
The corresponding seat position is performed
automatically.
The concept
The procedure stops when a reel for adjusting
Two driver's seat and exterior mirror positions
the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.
can be stored per profile, refer to page 35, and
called up. Settings for the backrest width and
lumbar support are not stored in memory.
Safety mode
1. Close the driver's door or reel on the igni‐
tion.
2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2
until the adjustment procedure is com‐
pleted.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
60
Online
Adjusting Controls
Calling up of a seat position At a glance

deactivated
After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐
tions is deactivated to save battery power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
▷ Open and close the door or trunk lid.
▷ Press a button on the remote control.
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
1 Adjusting 61
Mirrors
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
Exterior mirrors 3 Fold in and out 62
General information Selecting a mirror

The mirror on the passenger side is more
To change over to the other mirror:
curved than the driver's side mirror.
Slide the switch.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mir‐
ror setting is stored for the profile currently in
use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐ Adjusting electrically
mote control, the position is automatically re‐
The setting corresponds to the direc‐
trieved if this function is active.
tion in which the button is pressed.
Note
Estimating distances correctly
Saving positions
Seat and mirror memory, refer to page 60.
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. Do not estimate the distance
to the traffic behind you based on what you
Adjusting manually
see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk In case of electrical malfunction press edges of
of an accident.◀ mirror.
Automatic Curb Monitor
The concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the front passenger side is tilted downward.
This improves your view of the curb and other
low-lying obstacles when parking, e.g.
Activating
1. Slide the switch to the driver's side

mirror position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
61
Online
Controls Adjusting
2. Engage selector lever position R. Interior rearview mirror, manually

dimmable
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror Flip lever
position.
Fold in and out

Press button.
Possible at speeds up to approx.

15 mph/20 km/h.
E. g. this is advantageous
▷ In car washes. To reduce the blinding effect of the interior
▷ In narrow streets. rear view mirror, flip the lever forward.
▷ For folding mirrors back out that were
folded away manually. Turn knob
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Fold in the mirror in a car wash
Before washing the car in an automatic
car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or
with the button; otherwise, the mirrors could
be damaged, depending on the width of the
vehicle.◀
Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by
Automatic heating the interior mirror.
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running. Interior rearview mirror, automatic
dimming feature
Automatic dimming feature
Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐ The concept
med. Photocells are used to control the Interior
rearview mirror, refer to page 62.
Photocells are used for control:

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovidedby:
62
Online
Adjusting Controls
▷ In the mirror glass. Steering wheel heating

▷ On the back of the mirror.
For proper operation:
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
rearview mirror and the windshield.
Press button.
Steering wheel
▷ On: the LED lights up.
Note
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Do not adjust while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement
could result in an accident.◀
Adjusting
1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
tion.
3. Fold the lever back.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
63
Online
Controls Transporting children safely
Transporting children safely

The right place for children

Note Note
Children in the vehicle Deactivating the front-seat passenger
Do not leave children unattended in the airbags
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐ If a child restraint system is used in the front
selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the passenger seat, deactivate the front-seat pas‐
doors.◀ senger airbags; otherwise, there is an in‐
creased risk of injury to the child when the air‐
Children should always be in the rear bags are activated, even with a child restraint
system.◀
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the back seat.
Transporting children in the rear
Installing child restraint
Only transport children younger than
systems
13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in
the rear in child restraint systems provided in
Hints
accordance with the age, weight and size of
the child; otherwise, there is an increased risk Manufacturer's information for child re‐
of injury in an accident. straint systems
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a To select, mount and use child restraint sys‐
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint tems, observe the information provided by the
system can no longer be used due to their age, system manufacturer; otherwise, the protec‐
weight and size.◀ tive effect can be lost.◀
Ensuring the stability of the child seat

Children on the front passenger seat
When installing child restraint systems,
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐ make sure that the child seat is securely fas‐
straint system in the front passenger seat, tened to the backrest of the seat. Angle and
make sure that the front, knee and side airbags headrest of the backrest might need to be ad‐
on the front passenger side are deactivated. justed or possibly be removed. Make sure that
Automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐ all backrests are securely locked. Otherwise
ger airbags, refer to page 101. the stability of the child seat can be affected,
and there is an increased risk of injury because
I
nfor
mat
ionProvidedby:
64
Online
Transporting children safely Controls
of unexpected movement of the seat back‐ the adjustment after this; otherwise, the stabil‐
rest.◀ ity of the child seat will be reduced.◀
Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
On the front passenger seat child restraint system in the front passenger
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do
Deactivating airbags not change the backrest width again and do
Deactivating the front-seat passenger not call up a memory position.
airbags
If a child restraint system is used in the front
Child seat security
passenger seat, deactivate the front-seat pas‐
senger airbags; otherwise, there is an in‐
creased risk of injury to the child when the air‐
bags are activated, even with a child restraint
system.◀
After installing a child restraint system in the

front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated.
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐
automatically, refer to page 101.
ten child restraint systems.
Seat position and height The front passenger safety belt can be perma‐
nently locked to fasten child restraint systems.
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐
ble and adjust its height to the highest and Locking the safety belt
thus best possible position for the belt and to 1. Pull out the strap completely.
offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
dent.
belt.
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
3. Allow the strap to be pulled in and pull it
cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
tight against the child restraint system.
move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐
The safety belt is locked.
til the best possible belt guide position is
reached.
Unlocking the safety belt
Backrest width 1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.
Backrest width for the child seat 2. Remove the child restraint system.
Before installing a child restraint system 3. Allow the strap to be pulled in completely.
in the front passenger seat, the backrest width
must be opened completely. Do not change
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
65
Online
Controls Transporting children safely
LATCH child restraint system

LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐ Before installing LATCH child
dren. restraint systems
Pull the belt away from the area of the child re‐
Note straint system.
Follow manufacturer's information for
LATCH child restraint systems Assembly of LATCH child restraint
To mount and use the LATCH child restraint
systems
systems, observe the operating and safety in‐ 1. Mount the child restraint system; refer to
formation from the system manufacturer; oth‐ the user's manual of the system.
erwise, the level of protection may be re‐ 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
duced.◀ erly connected.
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors Upper LATCH retaining strap
The lower anchors may be used to attach the For Canadian customers Only.
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child The following statement is required by Trans‐
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child port Canada:
is restrained by the internal harnesses. This vehicle is not equipped with user-ready
tether anchorages. As such neither a child re‐
Note straint system, nor a booster cushion, requirer‐
Properly engage the lower LATCH an‐ ing the use of a tether strap can be properly
chors secured in the vehicle.
Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have
properly engaged and that the child restraint
system is resting snugly against the backrest;
otherwise, the degree of protection may be re‐
duced.◀
Position
The corresponding symbol shows the
mounts for the lower LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower anchors are
marked with a pair, 2, of LATCH sym‐
bols. It is not recommended to use the
inner lower anchors of standard outer
LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint
system on the middle seat. Use the vehicle
seat belt instead for the middle seat.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
66
Online
Driving Controls
Driving
Vehicle features and options Ignition off
Steptronic transmission: Press the Start/Stop
button again without stepping on the brake.
series. It also describes features that are not Manual transmission: Press the Start/Stop but‐
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to ton again without stepping on the clutch pedal.
the selected options or country versions. This All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go
also applies to safety-related functions and out.
systems. The respectively applicable country To save battery power when the engine is off,
provisions must be observed when using the switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
respective features and systems. electronic systems/power consumers.
P when the ignition is switched off
Start/Stop button P is engaged automatically when the ig‐
nition is switched off. When in an automatic car
The concept wash, e.g., ensure that the ignition is not
switched off accidentally.◀
Pressing the Start/Stop button
switches the ignition on or off The ignition automatically cuts off while the
and starts the engine. vehicle is stationary and the engine is stopped:
Steptronic transmission: The ▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the
engine starts if the brakes are low beams are activated.
stepped on while pressing the Start/Stop but‐ ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
ton. completely, so that the engine can still be
Manual transmission: The engine starts with started. This function is only available
the clutch pedal pressed when the Start/Stop when the low beams are turned off.
button is pressed. ▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
Ignition on the low beams are turned off.
Steptronic transmission: Press the Start/Stop ▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
button without stepping on the brake. with driver's door open and low beams off.
Manual transmission: Press the Start/Stop but‐ The low beams switch to parking lights after
ton without stepping on the clutch pedal. approx. 15 minutes of no use.
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
Radio ready state
Most of the indicator and warning lights in the
Activate radio-ready state:
instrument cluster light up for a varied length
of time. ▷ When the engine is running: press the
Start/Stop button.
To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary Some electronic systems/power consumers
electronic systems/power consumers. remain ready for operation.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
67
Online
Controls Driving
The radio-ready state switches off automati‐ Repeated starting in quick succession
cally: Avoid trying to start the vehicle repeat‐
▷ After approx. 8 minutes. edly and in quick succession. Otherwise, the
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐ fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned,
tral locking system. posing a risk of overheating and damage to the
catalytic converter.◀
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
completely, so that the engine can still be Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
started. the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at
The radio-ready state remains active if, e.g., moderate engine speeds.
the ignition is automatically switched off for the
following reasons: Steptronic transmission
▷ Opening or closing the driver's door.
Starting the engine
▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt.
1. Depress the brake pedal.
▷ When automatically switching from low
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
beams to parking lights.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
If the engine is switched off and the ignition is
certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
switched on, the system automatically
gine starts.
switches to the radio-ready state if the lights
are turned off or, if correspondingly equipped,
Manual transmission
the daytime running lights are activated.
Starting the engine
Starting the engine
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neu‐
Hints tral.
Enclosed areas 3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Do not let the engine run in enclosed The ignition is activated automatically for a
areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
lead to loss of consciousness and death. The gine starts.
exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an
odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀
Engine stop
Unattended vehicle
Do not leave the vehicle unattended with Hints
the engine running; doing so poses a risk of Take the remote control with you
danger.
Take the remote control with you when
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐
ning, set the parking brake and place the trans‐ not start the engine.◀
mission in selector lever position P or N to pre‐
vent the vehicle from moving.◀ Apply parking brake and further secure
the vehicle if needed.
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐
I
nfor
mat
i erwise,
onProvidedthe
byvehicle
: could roll. On steep upward
68
Online
Driving Controls
and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐ is available when the vehicle is traveling faster
hicle, e.g., by turning the steering wheel in the than about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h.
direction of the curb.◀
Engine stop
Before driving into a car wash The engine is switched off automatically dur‐
So that the vehicle can roll into a car wash ob‐ ing a stop under the following conditions:
serve instructions for going into an automatic Steptronic transmission:
car wash, refer to page 210. ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
Steptronic transmission
▷ Brake pedal remains depressed while the
vehicle is stopped.
Switching off the engine
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
1. Engage selector lever position P with the
driver's door is closed.
vehicle stopped.
Manual transmission:
▷ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is
The engine is switched off.
not pressed.
The radio-ready state is switched on.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
3. Set the parking brake. driver's door is closed.
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
Manual transmission
when the engine is switched off.
Switching off the engine
Displays in the instrument cluster
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the
Start/Stop button. The READY display in the tach‐
ometer signals that the Auto
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
Start/Stop function is ready to
3. Set the parking brake. start the engine automatically.
The display indicates that the

Auto Start/Stop function conditions for an automatic en‐
gine stop have not been met.
The concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic Functional limitations
lights. The ignition remains switched on. The
The engine is not switched off automatically in
engine starts again automatically for driving
the following situations:
off.
▷ External temperature too low.
Automatic mode ▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
After every start of the engine using the Start/ matic climate control is running.
Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in ▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated
the last selected state, refer to page 70. or cooled to the required level.
When the Auto Start/Stop functionI is
nf
active,
ormat i
it ovi
onPr dedby:
69
Online
Controls Driving
▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐ Functional limitations

ature. Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
steering wheel is being turned. lowing situations:
▷ After driving in reverse. ▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ when the cooling function is switched on.
matic climate control is switched on. ▷ The steering wheel is turned.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. ▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐
▷ At higher elevations. lector lever position D to R, N or M/S.
▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked. ▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐
lector lever position P to N, D, R or M/S.
▷ The parking assistant is activated.
▷ The vehicle begins rolling.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐
▷ The selector lever is in position N, M/S or
matic climate control is switched on.
R.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when
Starting the engine the heating is switched on.
The engine starts automatically under the fol‐ ▷ Low brake vacuum pressure; this can oc‐
lowing conditions: cur, e.g., if the brake pedal is depressed a
number of times in succession.
▷ Steptronic transmission:
By releasing the brake pedal. Activating/deactivating the system
▷ Manual transmission: manually
The clutch pedal is pressed.
Using the button
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met.
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied Press button.
length of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/ ▷ LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function is
Stop button. deactivated.
The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop.
The engine can only be stopped or started
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovvia
idethe
dbyStart/Stop
: button.
70
Online
Driving Controls
▷ LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is Releasing

activated.
Switching off the vehicle during an

automatic engine stop
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
can be switched off permanently, e. g., when
leaving it.
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function
is deactivated. Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide
Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐ the lever down.
matically.
Hints
2. Set the parking brake.
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button. Use while driving
On rare occasions if it is necessary to use
Automatic deactivation the parking brake while driving, do not use ex‐
In certain situations, Auto Start/Stop function cessive force when applying it. When using it,
is deactivated automatically for safety reasons keep the button on the lever depressed.
as if the driver were absent. Otherwise, using excessive force when apply‐
ing the parking brake may cause the rear
Malfunction wheels to lock, resulting in fishtailing.◀
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake ac‐
switches off the engine automatically. A Check tion, lightly apply the parking brake periodically
Control message is displayed. It is possible to while coasting, if traffic conditions permit.
continue driving. Have the system checked.
The brake lights will not light up if the parking
brake is set.
Parking brake
Applying
Turn signal, high beams,
The lever automatically engages after being
headlight flasher
pulled up.
Turn signal
The indicator lamp lights up red. The
Do not adjust the exterior mirrors
parking brake is set.
Do not adjust the exterior mirror while
Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian
driving and when turn signals/hazard warning
models
flashers are on, or else the additional turn sig‐
nal lights in the exterior mirror are out of posi‐
tion and can't be seen.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
71
Online
Controls Driving
Using turn signals High beams, headlight flasher
Press the lever beyond the resistance point. ▷ High beams, arrow 1.
To switch off manually, press the lever to the ▷ Headlight flasher, arrow 2.
resistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp

indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed. Washer/wiper system
Triple turn signal activation Switching the wipers on/off and brief
Press the lever to the resistance point. wipe
The turn signal flashes three times. Hints
The function can be activated or deactivated:
Do not activate wipers if frozen to wind‐
1. "Settings" shield
2. "Lighting" Do not switch on the wipers if they are frozen
3. "Triple turn signal" to the windshield; otherwise, the wiper blades
and the wiper motor may be damaged.◀
use. Do not activate wipers on dry windshield
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is
Signaling briefly dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold cause them to become worn more quickly.◀
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
Switching on
Push wiper lever up.

I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
72
Online
Driving Controls
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐ Activating/deactivating

sition when released.
▷ Normal wiper speed: push up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.
▷ Fast wiper speed: press up twice or press
once beyond the resistance point.
Wipers change to normal speed when ve‐
hicle comes to standstill.
Switch off and brief wipe Press button on the wiper lever.
Wiping is started. If the vehicle is equipped
with a rain sensor: LED in wiper lever lights up.
When wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper
operation is deactivated.
Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes

Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash; otherwise, un‐
intentional wiping can cause damages.◀
Push wiper lever down.
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐ Setting the frequency or sensitivity of
sition when released. the rain sensor
▷ Single wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down
once.
▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.
Interval mode or rain sensor
The concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time Turn the thumbwheel.
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐
shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐
ror.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
73
Online
Controls Driving
Clean the windshield, headlights Folding wipers back down

Before switching the ignition on, fold the
wipers back down to the windshield; other‐
wise, the wipers may become damaged when
they are activated.◀
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Push wiper lever down. Wipers move to
their resting position and are ready again
for operation.
Pull the wiper lever towards you.

The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐ Washer fluid
shield and activates the wipers briefly.
Hints
In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regu‐
lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are acti‐ Antifreeze for washer fluid
vated. Antifreeze is flammable and can cause
Do not use the washer system at freezing injury if it is used incorrectly.
temperatures Therefore, keep it away from possible sources
Do not use the washers if fluid could freeze of ignition.
onto the windshield which might impede your Only keep it in the closed original container
viewing field. Therefore use antifreeze fluid. and inaccessible to children.
Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐
empty; operation might damage pump.◀ tainer.
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is
Windshield washer nozzles regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐ states; do not exceed the allowable washer
cally heated while the ignition is switched on. fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
Fold-out position of the wipers tainer. Use BMW’s Windshield Washer Con‐
centrate or the equivalent.◀
Fold wipers back when you want to change the
blades or with pending low temperatures. Adding washer fluid
1. Switch the ignition on and off again. Only add washer fluid when the engine is
cool, and then close the cover completely to
2. With icy conditions make sure that blades
avoid contact between the washer fluid and
are not frozen to the windshield.
hot engine parts.
3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point
Otherwise, there is a danger of fire and a risk to
of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐
personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀
onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly
vertical position.
After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
74
Online
Driving Controls
Washer fluid reservoir Steptronic transmission

Selector lever positions
D Drive
Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐
ation. All gears for forward travel are activated
automatically.
R is Reverse
All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐ Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
ervoir.
Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐ N Neutral:
centrate and tap water and – if required – with a The vehicle may roll. Use in automatic car
washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐ washes, e.g.
turer's recommendations. When the ignition is switched off, refer to
Mix the washer fluid before adding to find the page 67, selector lever position P is engaged
right mixture. automatically.
Do not add windshield washer concentrate and
antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure P Park
water; this could damage the wiper system. Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐ drive wheels are blocked.
ferent manufacturers because they can clog P is engaged automatically:
the windshield washer nozzles. ▷ After the engine is switched off when the
Recommended minimum fill quantity: vehicle is in radio-ready state, refer to
0.2 US gal/1 liter. page 67, or when the ignition is switched
off, refer to page 67, and when selector
lever position R or D is set.
Manual transmission ▷ With the ignition off, if selector lever posi‐
tion N is set.
Shifting ▷ If the driver's safety belt is released, the
Shifting into 5th or 6th gear driver's door is opened, and the brake
When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is
the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise, inad‐ stationary and selector lever position D or
vertent shifting into 3rd or 4th gear could lead R is set.
to engine damage.◀ Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se‐
lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the ve‐
hicle may begin to move.
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. Kickdown
To overcome the resistance push the selector Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
lever dynamically to the left and engage the re‐ performance. Step on the accelerator pedal
verse gear.
Inf
ormat i
onPr ovidedby:
75
Online
Controls Driving
beyond the resistance point at the full throttle ▷ Shift out of P.

position.
Engaging P
Engaging selector lever positions
Press on the brake pedal until you start
driving
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a gear, maintain pressure on the brake
pedal until you are ready to start.◀
▷ It is not possible to shift out of selector
lever position P until the engine is running
and the brake is applied.
▷ With the vehicle is stationary, press on the Press button P.
brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
otherwise, the shift command will not be Sport program and manual mode
executed: shift lock.
Activating the sport program
Engaging D, R and N
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐

Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐ tor lever position D.
rection, beyond a resistance point if needed.
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
After releasing the selector lever, it returns to vated.
its center position.
Activating the M/S manual mode

1. Press the selector lever to the left out of
selector lever position D.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it
backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, e.g., M1.
Press unlock button, in order to:
▷ Engage R.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
76
Online
Driving Controls
Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/S However, this effect is not produced via the
manual mode is automatically upshifted as shift paddles when switching briefly from D to
needed. manual mode.
Switching to manual mode Ending the sport program/manual

▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ mode
ward. Push the selector lever to the right.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐ D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
wards.
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine Shift paddles
and road speeds, for example downshifting is
not possible if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
strument cluster, followed by the currently se‐
lected gear.
Not M235i: Steptronic Sport

transmission: prevent automatic
upshifting in M/S manual mode
The Steptronic Sport transmission does not The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
automatically upshift in M/S manual mode you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
once the maximum speed is reached, if one of hands on the steering wheel.
the following conditions is met: ▷ Shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.
▷ DSC deactivated. ▷ Shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
▷ TRACTION activated. ▷ With the respective transmission version,
▷ SPORT+ activated. the lowest possible gear can be selected
In addition, the kickdown is deactivated. by pulling and holding the left shift paddle.
With the respective transmission version, the Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
lowest possible gear can be selected by simul‐ and road speeds, for example downshifting is
taneously operating the kickdown and the left not possible if the engine speed is too high.
shift paddle. However, this effect is not pro‐ The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
duced via the shift paddles when switching strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
briefly from D to manual mode. If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are
used to shift gears in automatic mode, the
M235i: prevent automatic upshifting transmission temporarily switches to manual
in M/S manual mode mode.
Once maximum engine speed is attained, up‐ If the selector lever is still in selector lever po‐
shifting is not automatically performed in M/S sition D with the respective transmission ver‐
manual mode. sion, it is possible to switch back into the auto‐
In addition, the kickdown is deactivated. matic mode:
The lowest possible gear is selected by simul‐ ▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle.
taneously operating the kickdown and the left Or
shift paddle. I
nformat i
onProvidedby:
77
Online
Controls Driving
▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift Steptronic Sport transmission:

paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle. Launch Control
In the manual mode, after conservative driving
for a certain amount of time or if there has The concept
been no acceleration or shifting of the shift Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
paddles within a certain amount of time, the on surfaces with good traction.
transmission switches back to automatic
mode. Hints
Component wear
Displays in the instrument cluster Do not use Launch Control too often;
The selector lever position is dis‐ otherwise, this may result in premature wear of
played, e.g.: P. components due to the high stress placed on
the vehicle.◀
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,

refer to page 156, period.
Electronic unlocking of the To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC
transmission lock again as soon as possible.
General information An experienced driver may be able to achieve

better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
maneuver vehicle from the danger area.
Requirements
Unlocking is possible, if the started can spin
Launch Control is available when the engine is
the engine.
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving
of at least 6 miles/10 km.
Engaging selector lever position N
To start with Launch Control do not steer the
steering wheel.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter
must audibly start. Start with launch control
3. Press and hold the selector lever into posi‐ While the engine is running:
tion N.
A corresponding Check Control message 1. Press button or select Sport+ with
is displayed. the Driving Dynamics Control.
4. Press the selector lever again into posi‐ TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
tion N within approx. 6 seconds. cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF
Position N is displayed in the instrument lights up.
cluster. 2. Engage selector lever position S.
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter 3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
stops. the brake.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area 4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
and secure it against moving on its own. beyond the resistance point at the full
throttle position.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
78
Online
Driving Controls
A flag symbol is displayed in the instru‐

ment cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐
mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes.
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding
conditions, e.g., wet pavement, when used
again.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
79
Online
Controls Displays
Displays
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Speedometer 5 Electronic displays 80

2 Messages, e.g. Check Control 6 Fuel gauge 84
3 Tachometer 84 7 Reset miles 84
4 Current fuel consumption
Electronic displays
▷ Selection lists, refer to page 88. ▷ Date, refer to page 85.
▷ External temperature, refer to page 85. ▷ Energy recovery, refer to page 86.
▷ Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 69. ▷ Transmission display, refer to page 78.
▷ On-board computer, refer to page 89.
Inf
ormat
i ▷r
onP Miles/trip
ovdedby:miles, refer to page 84.
i
80
Online
Displays Controls
▷ Messages, e.g. Check Control, refer to also be activated if objects are placed on the
page 81. front passenger seat.
▷ Navigation display, see User's manual for Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐ correctly.
cation.
▷ Range, refer to page 85. Airbag system
▷ Status, Driving Dynamics Control, refer to Airbag system and belt tensioner are
page 119. defective.
▷ Service requirements, refer to page 86. Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐
▷ Speed limit detection, refer to page 87. ice center immediately.
▷ Time, refer to page 85.
Parking brake, brake system
For additional information, refer to Re‐
Check Control lease parking brake, refer to page 71.
The concept
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions
in the monitored systems.
Front-end collision warning
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lights and Illuminated: advance warning is issued,
text messages in the instrument cluster. e.g., when there is the impending dan‐
ger of a collision or the distance to the
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a vehicle ahead is too small.
text message may appear on the Control Dis‐
play. Increase distance.
Flashing: acute warning of the imminent dan‐
Indicator/warning lights ger of a collision when the vehicle approaches
another vehicle at a relatively high differential
General information speed.
The indicator and warning lights in the instru‐ Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐
ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐ neuver.
nations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper Pedestrian warning
functioning and light up temporarily when the
Symbol in the instrument cluster.
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Red lights If a collision with a person detected in this way

is imminent, the symbol lights up and a signal
Safety belt reminder sounds.
Flashing or illuminated: safety belt on
the driver or passenger side is not
buckled. The safety belt reminder can
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
81
Online
Controls Displays
Yellow lights Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

Illuminated: the Tire Pressure Monitor
Anti-lock Braking System ABS
signals a loss of tire inflation pressure
Avoid abrupt braking if possible. Brak‐ in a tire.
ing force boost in some cases defec‐ Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
tive. Stop carefully. Take into account sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
longer brake travel. Have this checked
Flashing and then continuously illuminated: no
by the service center immediately.
flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be
detected.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control ▷ Interference through systems or devices
Flashing: DSC controls the drive and with the same radio frequency: after leav‐
braking forces. The vehicle is stabi‐ ing the area of the interference, the system
lized. Reduce speed and adapt driving automatically becomes active again.
profile to the driving circumstances. ▷ TPM could not conclude the reset: perform
Illuminated: DSC failed. Have the system the reset of the system again.
checked by the service center. ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted:
For additional information, refer to Dynamic have the service center check it if needed.
Stability Control DSC, refer to page 117. ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by
your service center.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is For more information, see Tire Pressure Moni‐
deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction tor, refer to page 103.
Control is activated
Dynamic Stability Control DSC is Steering system
switched off or Dynamic Traction Con‐
Steering system in some cases defec‐
trol DTC is switched on.
tive.
For additional information, refer to Dynamic
Have the steering system checked by
Stability Control, refer to page 117, and Dy‐
the service center.
namic Traction Control, refer to page 118.
Engine functions
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
ice center.
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
For additional information, refer to On-
Reduce your speed and stop cau‐
board Diagnostics socket, refer to page 194.
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐
neuvers.
For more information, see Flat Tire Monitor, re‐ Lane departure warning
fer to page 107. System is switched on and under cer‐
tain circumstances warns if a detected
lane is left without flashing beforehand.
For additional information, refer to Lane depar‐
ture warning, refer to page 114.
I
nfor
mat
ionProvidedby:
82
Online
Displays Controls
Green lights General lamps
Turn signal Check Control

Turn signal on. At least one Check Control message is
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator displayed or is stored. The symbol is
lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb shown in the display of the instrument
has failed. cluster.
For additional information, refer to Turn signal,

refer to page 71. Text messages
Text messages in combination with a symbol
Parking lights, headlight control in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐
trol message and the meaning of the indicator
Parking lights or headlights are acti‐ and warning lights.
vated.
Supplementary text messages
Front fog lights Additional information, such as on the cause of
an error or the required action, can be called up
Front fog lights are activated.
via Check Control.
For additional information, refer to
With urgent messages the added text will be
Front fog lights, refer to page 97.
automatically displayed on the Control Display.
High-beam Assistant Symbols

High-beam Assistant is switched on. Within the supplementary text, the following
High beams are activated and off auto‐ functions can be selected independent of the
matically as a function of the traffic sit‐ check control message.
uation. ▷ Display additional information about
For additional information, refer to High-beam the Check Control message in the
Assistant, refer to page 96. Integrated Owner's Manual.
▷ "Service request"
Cruise control Contact your service center.

▷ "Roadside Assistance"
The system is switched on. It maintains
the speed that was set using the con‐ Contact Roadside Assistance.
trol elements on the steering wheel.
Blue lights
High beams
High beams are activated.
For additional information, refer to High
beams, refer to page 72.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
83
Online
Controls Displays
Hiding Check Control messages Fuel gauge

Vehicle tilt position may cause
the display to vary.
Depending on the equipment
version, the arrow beside the
fuel pump symbol shows which
side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.
Hints on refueling, refer to page 170.
Press the onboard computer button on the

turn signal lever. Tachometer
▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐ Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
played continuously and are not cleared field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐
until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐ rupted to protect the engine.
eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐
sages are displayed consecutively.
These messages can be faded for approx. Coolant temperature
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐ If the coolant along with the engine becomes
played again automatically. too hot, a Check Control message is displayed.
▷ Other Check Control messages are faded Check the coolant level, refer to page 192.
automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
They are stored and can be displayed
again later.
Odometer and trip odometer
Displaying stored Check Control
Display
messages
On the Control Display: ▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message. Show/reset kilometers
Messages after trip completion Press the knob.
Special messages displayed while driving are ▷ When the ignition is

displayed again after the ignition is switched switched off, the time, the
off. external temperature and
the odometer are displayed.
▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
84
Online
Displays Controls
External temperature The Check Control message appears continu‐

ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
If the indicator drops to
+37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal Refuel promptly
sounds. Refuel no later than at a range of
A Check Control message is 30 miles/50 km or engine operation might fail
displayed. and damage might occur.◀
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Ice on roads Current fuel consumption

Even at temperatures above
+37 ℉/+3 ℃, roads might be icy. Instrument cluster
Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and Displays the current fuel con‐
shaded roads, e.g., to avoid the increased risk sumption. Check whether you
of an accident.◀ are currently driving in an effi‐
cient and environmentally-
friendly manner.
Time
Instrument cluster with enhanced
The time is displayed in the in‐ features
strument cluster.
Displays the current fuel con‐
Setting the time on the Control
sumption. Check whether you
Display, refer to page 91.
are currently driving in an effi‐
cient and environmentally-
friendly manner.
Date
The date is displayed in the in‐ Displaying the current fuel
strument cluster. consumption
Set the date on the Control Dis‐ Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
play, refer to page 92. the current fuel consumption can also be dis‐
played as bar in the instrument cluster.
Range 1. "Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster"
Display 3. "Additional indicators"
With a low remaining range:
▷ A Check Control message is
displayed briefly.
▷ The remaining range is
shown on the computer.
▷ With a dynamic driving style - e.g., taking
curves aggressively - engine operation
might vary.
Infor mat i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
85
Online
Controls Displays
Energy recovery Symbols
Display Sym‐ Description

bols
The kinetic energy of the vehicle
is converted to electrical energy No service is currently required.
while coasting. The vehicle bat‐
tery is partially charged and fuel
consumption can be reduced. The deadline for scheduled mainte‐
nance or a legally mandated inspec‐
tion is approaching.
Service requirements The service deadline has already

passed.
The concept
After the ignition is turned on the instrument
cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐
Entering appointment dates
tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐ Enter the dates for the required inspections.
nance. Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
Your service specialist can read the current set correctly.
service requirements from your remote con‐ On the Control Display:
trol.
1. "Vehicle info"
Display 2. "Vehicle status"
Data regarding the service status or legally 3. "Service required"
mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐ 4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
cally transmitted to your service center before
5. "Date:"
a service due date.
6. Adjust the settings.
Detailed information on service 7. Confirm.
requirements The entered date is stored.
More information on the scope of service re‐
quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ Automatic Service Request
play. Data regarding the service status or legally
On the Control Display: mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐
cally transmitted to your service center before
1. "Vehicle info"
a service due date.
2. "Vehicle status"
You can check when your service center was
3. "Service required" notified.
Required maintenance procedures and le‐ On the Control Display:
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
1. "Vehicle info"
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
tion. 2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
I
nfor
mat
i 4.r
onP ov"Last
idedb Service
y: Request"
86
Online
Displays Controls
Gear shift indicator Speed limit detection

The concept The concept
The system recommends the most fuel effi‐
cient gear for the current driving situation. Speed limit detection
Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐ Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the
try version of the vehicle, the gear shift indica‐ shape of a traffic sign to display the currently
tor is active in the manual mode of the Step‐ detected speed limit. The camera in the area of
tronic transmission and with manual the interior rearview mirror detects traffic signs
transmission. at the edge of the road as well as variable over‐
head sign posts. Traffic signs with extra sym‐
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
bols for wet road conditions, etc. are also de‐
tected and compared with the vehicle's
onboard data, such as for the rain sensor, and
Manual transmission: displaying will be displayed depending on the situation.
The system takes into account the information
Symbol Description
stored in the navigation system and also dis‐
Fuel efficient gear is set. plays speed limits present on routes without
signs.
Shift up to fuel efficient gear. Hints

Personal judgment
The system cannot serve as a substitute
Shift down to fuel efficient gear.
for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic
situation.
Shift into neutral. The system assists the driver and does not re‐
place the human eye.◀
At a glance
Steptronic transmission: displays
Camera
Example Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
The camera is found near the interior rearview

mirror.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
87
Online
Controls Displays
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ ▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
terior rearview mirror clean and clear. camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
Switching on/off system are incorrect.
On the Control Display: ▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
1. "Settings"
▷ When roads differ from the navigation,
2. "Instrument cluster" such as due to changes in road routing.
3. "Speed limit information" ▷ When passing buses or trucks with a
If speed limit detection is switched on, it can speed sticker.
be displayed on the info display in the instru‐ ▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
ment cluster via the computer.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle shipment.
Display
The following is displayed in the instrument
cluster:
Selection lists in the
Speed limit detection instrument cluster
Current speed limit. The concept
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
the following can be displayed or operated us‐
ing the buttons and the thumbwheel on the
steering wheel and the display in the instru‐
Speed limit detection is not ment cluster:
available. ▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial phone feature.
▷ Turn on voice activation system.
It also displays programs of the Driving Dy‐
System limits namics Control.
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ When signs are concealed by objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered by a sticker, etc.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
88
Online
Displays Controls
Display On-board computer

Calling up information on the info
display
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,

the list in the instrument cluster can differ from
the illustration shown.
Press the onboard computer button on the
Activating a list and adjusting the turn signal lever.
setting Information is displayed in the info display of
the instrument cluster.
Information at a glance
Info display
Repeatedly pressing the button
on the turn signal lever calls up
the following information in the
info display:
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn
▷ Range.
the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding
list. ▷ ECO PRO bonus range.
Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐ ▷ Average fuel consumption.
ting and confirm it by pushing the thumbwheel. ▷ Current fuel consumption.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date.
▷ Speed limit detection.
▷ Time of arrival.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
▷ Arrow view of navigation system.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
89
Online
Controls Displays
When destination guidance is activated in The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
the navigation system. tomatically.
Time of arrival
Adjusting the info display
Depending on the vehicle equipment version, The estimated time of arrival is
you can select what information from the com‐ displayed if a destination is en‐
puter is to be displayed on the info display of tered in the navigation system
the instrument cluster. before the trip is started.

The time must be correctly set.
1. "Settings"
2. "Instrument cluster" Speed limit detection
3. Select the desired displays. Description of the speed limit detection, refer
to page 87, function.
Information in detail
Trip computer
Range The vehicle features two types of board com‐
Displays the estimated cruising range available puters.
with the remaining fuel. ▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as
It is calculated based on your driving style over often as necessary.
the last 20 miles/30 km. ▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an
overview of the current trip.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for Resetting the trip computer
the period while the engine is running. On the Control Display:
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
1. "Vehicle info"
the distance traveled since the last reset by the
on-board comupter. 2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset": all values are reset.
Average speed "Automatically reset": all values are reset
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the approx. 4 hours after the vehicle came to a
engine manually stopped are not included in standstill.
the calculation of the average speed.
Display on the Control Display
Resetting average values Display the computer or trip computer on the
Press and hold the onboard computer button Control Display.
on the turn signal lever. On the Control Display:
Distance to destination 1. "Vehicle info"

The distance remaining to the destination is 2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐
gation system before the trip is started.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
90
Online
Displays Controls
Resetting the fuel consumption and Activating/deactivating the speed

speed warning
On the Control Display: On the Control Display:
1. "Vehicle info" 1. "Settings"

2. "Onboard info" 2. "Speed"
3. "Consumpt." or "Speed" 3. "Warning"
4. "Yes" 4. Press the controller.
Setting your current speed as the

Sport displays speed warning
The concept
1. "Settings"
On the Control Display, the current values for
performance and torque can be displayed if 2. "Speed"
the vehicle is appropriately equipped. 3. "Select current speed"
Displaying sport displays on the
The current vehicle speed is stored as the
Control Display
speed warning.
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Sport displays"
Settings on the Control
Display
Speed warning
Time
The concept
Displays a speed, when reached, should cause Setting the time zone
a warning to be issued. 1. "Settings"
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed 2. "Time/Date"
drops below the set speed once by at least
3. "Time zone:"
3 mph/5 km/h.
4. Select the desired time zone.
Displaying, setting or changing the The time zone is stored.
speed warning
On the Control Display: Setting the time
1. "Settings"
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
2. "Speed"
3. "Time:"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
4. Turn the controller until the desired speed
are displayed.
is displayed.
Speed warning is stored. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
91
Online
Controls Displays
6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐ Language

nutes are displayed.
7. Press the controller. Setting the language
The time is stored. To set the language on the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
Setting the time format
2. "Language/Units"
1. "Settings"
3. "Language:"
2. "Time/Date"
4. Select the desired language.
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format. use.
The time format is stored.
Setting the voice dialog
Automatic time setting Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
Depending on your vehicle's optional features, refer to page 28.
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
updated automatically. Units of measure
1. "Settings"
Setting the units of measure
2. "Time/Date"
To set the units for fuel consumption, route/
3. "Auto time set" distance and temperature:
Date 1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
Setting the date 3. Select the desired menu item.
1. "Settings" 4. Select the desired unit.
2. "Time/Date" Settings are stored for the profile currently in
3. "Date:" use.
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed. Brightness
Setting the brightness
6. Make the necessary settings for the month
To set the brightness of the Control Display:
and year.
The date is stored. 1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
Setting the date format 3. "Brightness"
1. "Settings" 4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
2. "Time/Date" ness is set.
3. "Format:" 5. Press the controller.
4. Select the desired format. Settings are stored for the profile currently in
The date format is stored. use.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
92
Online
Displays Controls
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐

ness settings may not be clearly visible.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
93
Online
Controls Lights
Lights
Vehicle features and options Parking lights/low beams,
This chapter describes all standard, country- headlight control
series. It also describes features that are not General information
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to Position of switch: , ,
the selected options or country versions. This If the driver door is opened with the ignition
also applies to safety-related functions and switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐
systems. The respectively applicable country cally switched off at these switch settings.
respective features and systems. Parking lights
Position of switch : the vehicle's lights
light up on all sides, e.g., for parking.
Overview
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery
and it would then be impossible to start the en‐
gine.
When parking, it is preferable to switch on the
one-sided roadside parking lights, refer to
page 95.
Low beams
Position of switch with the ignition
1 Rear fog lights switched on: the low beams light up.
2 Front fog lights
3 Depending on the equipment: automatic Welcome lights
headlight control, Adaptive Light Control, When the vehicle is parked, leave the switch in
High-beam Assistant, Welcome lights, position or : parking and interior lights
Daytime running lights come on briefly when the vehicle is unlocked
4 Lights off, daytime running lights depending on the ambient brightness.
5 Parking lights, daytime running lights
Activating/deactivating
6 Depending on the equipment: low beams,
1. "Settings"
welcome lights, High-beam Assistant
2. "Lighting"
7 Instrument lighting
3. "Welcome lights"
use.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
94
Online
Lights Controls
Headlight courtesy delay feature Activating/deactivating

The low beams stay lit for a short while if the In some countries, daytime running lights are
headlight flasher is switched on after the radio- mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
ready state is switched off. vate the daytime running lights.
1. "Settings"
Setting the duration
2. "Lighting"
1. "Settings"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway lighting:"
use.
4. Set length of time.
Settings are stored for the profile currently in Roadside parking lights
use.
Automatic headlight control

Position of switch : the low beams are acti‐
vated and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in
twilight or if there is precipitation. The indicator
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
When emerging from a tunnel during the day,
the low beams are not switched off immedi‐
ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes. The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on. Switching on
The low beams always stay on when the fog With the ignition switched off, press the lever
lights are activated. either up or down past the resistance point for
approx. 2 seconds.
Personal responsibility
The automatic headlight control cannot Switch off
serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐
Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in
ment in determining when to turn the lights on
the opposite direction.
in response to ambient lighting conditions.
E. g. the sensors are unable to detect fog or
hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under
these conditions, you should always switch on
Adaptive Light Control
the lights manually.◀
The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlight
Daytime running lights control system that enables dynamic illumina‐
With the ignition switched on, the daytime run‐ tion of the road surface.
ning lights light up in position , or
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
. After the ignition is switched off, the park‐
rameters, the light from the headlight follows
ing lights light up in position .
the course of the road.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
95
Online
Controls Lights
In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or fore, manually reel off the high beams in situa‐
when turning, one of the two front fog lights is tions where required to avoid a safety risk.◀
switched on as a turning lamp. As a result the
inside of the curve is better lighted. Activating
Activating
Position of switch with the ignition
switched on.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐
tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐
er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
The turning lights are automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals. 1. Depending on the equipment, turn the light
When driving in reverse, the turning lights may switch into position or .
be automatically switched on regardless of the 2. Press button on the turn signal lever, ar‐
steering angle. row.
Malfunction The indicator lamp in the instrument

cluster lights up.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or has When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐
failed. Have the system checked as soon as tomatically brightened or dimmed.
possible. The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.
High-beam Assistant
The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐
ment cluster lights up when the system
The concept
switches on the high beams. Depend‐
When the low beams are activated, this system ing on the version of the system in the vehicle,
automatically switches the high beams on and the high beams may not switch off for oncom‐
off or suppresses the light in the areas that ing vehicles, but may only be dimmed in the
blind oncoming traffic. The procedure is con‐ areas that blind oncoming traffic. In this case,
trolled by a camera on the front of the interior the blue indicator light will stay on.
rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the
high beams are activated whenever the traffic
situation allows. The driver can intervene at
any time and switch the high beams non and
off as usual.
Note
The High-beam Assistant cannot serve
as a substitute for the driver's personal judg‐
ment of when to use the high beams. There‐
Inf or
mati
onPr
ovi
dedby:
96
Online
Lights Controls
Switching the high beams on and off Fog lights

manually
Front fog lights
The low beams must be switched on.
Press button. The green indicator
lamp lights up.
If the automatic headlight control, refer to

page 95, is activated, the low beams will come
on automatically when you switch on the front
fog lights.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1. When the high beams or headlight flasher are
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2. activated, the front fog lights are not switched
on.
The High-beam Assistant can be switched off
when manually adjusting the light. To reacti‐
vate the High-beam Assistant, press the but‐ Instrument lighting
ton on the turn signal lever.
Adjusting
System limits
The parking lights or low beams
The system is not fully functional in situations
must be switched on to adjust
such as the following, and driver intervention
the brightness.
may be necessary:
Adjust the brightness with the
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
thumbwheel.
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or Interior lights
ship traffic; and at animal crossings.
General information
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐ The interior lights, footwell lights, access lights
coming traffic on freeways. and courtesy lights are controlled automati‐
cally.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs. Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐
trols brightness of some of these features.
▷ At low speeds.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
97
Online
Controls Lights
Overview Setting the brightness

The brightness of the ambient light can be ad‐
justed via the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting or on the Control Display.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Brightness:"
4. Adjust the brightness.
1 Interior lights
2 Reading lamp
Switching the interior lights on and off

Press button.
To reel off permanently: press the button for

approx. 3 seconds.
Switch back on: press button.
Reading lights
Press button.
Reading lights are located at the front and rear

next to the interior lights.
Ambient light
Depending on your optional features lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the interior.
Selecting color scheme

1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Ambient:"
4. Select desired setting.
With a color scheme selected and welcome
lights activated they illuminate in the line's
color when vehicle is unlocked.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
98
Online
Safety Controls
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 3 Side airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 4 Knee airbags
Front airbags Knee airbag

Front airbags help protect the driver and front The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in impact.
which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐
equate restraint. Protective action
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐
Side airbags tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end
In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the collisions.
side of the body in the chest and lap area.
I
nfor
mat ionProvi
dedby:
99
Online
Controls Safety
Information on how to ensure the optimal The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
protective effect of the airbags short-term and, in most cases, temporary
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags. hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the Malfunction, deactivation and after de‐
steering wheel rim, holding your hands at ploying the airbags
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to Do not touch the individual components imme‐
keep the risk of injury to your hands or diately after the system has been triggered;
arms as low as possible when the airbag is otherwise, you may risk burns.
triggered.
Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐
▷ There should be no person, animals, or ob‐ mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by
jects between an airbag and a person. the service center or an authorized repair shop
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on for handling explosives.
the front passenger side as a storage area. Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐
▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front tem could lead to failure in an emergency or
passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐ unintentional activation of the airbag - both
tach adhesive labels or coverings and do may lead to injury.◀
not attach brackets or cables, e. g., for GPS
Warnings and information on the airbags are
devices or' mobile phones.
also found on the sun visors.
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and Functional readiness of the airbag
legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries system
might occur when front airbag is activated.
When the ignition is reel on, the warn‐
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or ing lamp in the instrument cluster lights
other objects on the front passenger seat up briefly and thereby indicates the op‐
that are not approved specifically for seats erational readiness of the entire airbag system
with integrated side airbags. and the belt tensioner.
▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
Airbag system malfunctioning
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the
away from the side airbag; otherwise, inju‐
ignition is turned on.
ries might occur when airbag is activated.
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously.
▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
▷ Do not remove the steering wheel. In case of a malfunction have airbag sys‐
tem checked immediately.
▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, do not cover them or In case of a malfunction have airbag system
modify them in any way. checked immediately; otherwise, there is a risk
that the system does not function as expected
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
in case of a severe accident.◀
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, and the seats.◀
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags
I
nf
cannot be ruled out in certain situations. ormat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
100
Online
Safety Controls
Automatic deactivation of the front- ▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
seat passenger airbags could press against the seat from below.
The system reads if the front passenger seat is ▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐
sistance. Indicator lamp for the front-seat
Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐ passenger airbags
senger's side are either activated or deacti‐
vated.
Leave feet in the footwell
Make sure that the front passenger
keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise,
proper functioning of the front passenger air‐
bag might not be assured.◀
Child restraint fixing system in the front

passenger seat The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐ ger airbags indicates the operating state of the
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐ front-seat passenger airbags.
structions for children on the front passenger The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐
seat, see Children.◀ ther activated or deactivated.
▷ The indicator lamp lights up

Malfunction of the automatic
when a child is properly
deactivation system
seated in a child restraint fix‐
When transporting older children and adults, ing system or when the seat
the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐ is empty. The airbags on the
tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case, front passenger side are not
the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger activated.
airbags lights up.
▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when,
In this case, change the sitting position so that e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient
the front-seat passenger airbags are activated size is detected on the seat. The airbags
and the indicator lamp goes out. on the front passenger side are activated.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear. Detected child seats
To enable correct recognition of the occupied The system generally detects children seated
seat cushion in a child seat, particularly in child seats re‐
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats quired by NHTSA when the vehicle was manu‐
or other items to the front passenger seat factured. After installing a child seat, make
unless they are specifically recommended sure that the indicator lamp for the front-seat
by your vehicle's manufacturer. passenger airbags lights up. This indicates
that the child seat has been detected and the
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
front-seat passenger airbags are not activated.
passenger seat if a child restraint system is
to be installed on it.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
101
Online
Controls Safety
Strength of the driver's and front-seat Supplementing the reinforced front windshield
passenger airbag frame, the rollover protection system further
The explosive power that activates driver's/ increases passenger safety.
front passenger's airbags very much depends
on the positions of the driver's/front passeng‐ Hints
er's seat. Keep the movement area unobstructed
With a respective message appearing on Con‐ Always keep the movement area of the
trol Display calibrate the front seats to keep rollover protection system clear. Otherwise,
the accuracy of this function over the long- there may be damage or injuries when the roll‐
term. over protection system is triggered.◀
Calibrating the front seats

A corresponding message appears on the
Control Display.
1. Press the reel and move the respective

seat all the way forward.
2. Press the reel forward again. The seat still
moves forward slightly.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
The calibration procedure is completed when Do not place any objects on the covers of the
the message on the Control Display disap‐ rollover protection system.
pears.
In the event of malfunctions, deactivation
If the message continues to be displayed, re‐ or after deployment
peat the calibration.
Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐
If the message does not disappear after a re‐ mantled and the system scrapped by your
peat calibration, have the system checked as service center. Non-professional attempts to
soon as possible. service the system could lead to failure in an
Unobstructed area of movement emergency or unintentional activation of the
airbag - both may lead to injury.◀
Ensure that the area of movement of the
seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury
or damage to objects.◀ Triggered rollover protection system
After deployment or damage
After deployment of the rollover protec‐
Rollover protection system tion system or in the event of damage, have
the system checked and replaced.
The concept Have this work performed only by your service
The rollover protection system is automatically center; otherwise, this safety feature might not
activated in the event of a sufficiently serious work properly.◀
accident or if the longitudinal axis is tilted ex‐
cessively. The safety frames located behind
the rear headrests extend within fractions of a
second.
I
nformati
onPr
ovidedby:
102
Online
Safety Controls
Do not move convertible top Malfunction

When the rollover protection system is A Check Control message is displayed
extended, do not move the convertible top. when there is a malfunction.
Otherwise, damages or injuries may result.◀
If the rollover protection system was not
placed under any stress after an automatic Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
triggering, it can be pushed back by hand, e.g.
to close the convertible top. The protective The concept
function of the system is then restored.
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
1. Pull the release lever in the safety frame up the four mounted tires. The system warns you
and hold it, arrow 1. if there is a significant loss of pressure in one
or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the
tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure
and tire temperature.
Hints
Tire damage due to external factors
Sudden tire damage caused by external
circumstances cannot be recognized in ad‐
vance.◀
2. Push the safety frame down, arrow 2.
With use of the system observe further infor‐
3. Release the release lever only if the safety mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐
frame was pushed back almost completely. fer to page 174.
4. Push the safety frame down until it notice‐
ably engages. To do this, the safety frame Functional requirements
must be pressed far into its holder; high The system must have been reset with the
levels of force are required. correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐
Do not bend via the safety frame ble signaling of tire inflation pressure loss is
not assured.
Should the safety frame not have
snapped in place when it is released, then Reset the system after each adjustment of the
it moves back up with jerking movements. tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
When it is released, do not bend via the wheel change.
safety frame; otherwise, there is a risk of Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
injury with a safety frame that is not en‐ ensure that the system will operate properly.
gaged.◀
Status display
Slowly reduce pressure on the safety
frame in order to test whether it is latched. The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
5. Proceed likewise with the second safety
play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.
frame.
1. "Vehicle info"
2. "Vehicle status"
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovidedby
3. : Pressure Monitor (TPM)"
"Tire
103
Online
Controls Safety
The status is displayed. The tires are shown in gray and the status is
displayed.
Status control display After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
Tire and system status are indicated by the short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
color of the wheels and a text message on the accepted as reference values. The reset is
Control Display. completed automatically while driving.
The progress of the reset is displayed.
All wheels green
After a successfully completed Reset, the
System is active and will issue a warning rela‐ wheels on the Control Display are shown in
tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
the last reset. active" is displayed.
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
One wheel is yellow
you continue the reset resumes automatically.
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire. Low tire pressure message
All wheels are yellow The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Check Control message is displayed.
A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in
several tires. ▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in
tire inflation pressure.
Wheels, gray ▷ No reset was performed for the system.
The system cannot detect a flat tire due to a The system therefore issues a warning
malfunction. based on the tire inflation pressures before
the last reset.
Status information 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
The status control display additionally shows Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
the current tire inflation pressures. It shows the vers.
actual values read; they may vary depending
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
on driving style or weather conditions.
regular tires or run-flat tires.
Carry out reset Run-flat tires, refer to page 182, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the
Reset the system after each adjustment of the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
wheel change. Do not continue driving without run-flat
On the Control Display and on the vehicle: tires
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not
1. "Vehicle info" equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
2. "Vehicle status" may result in serious accidents.◀
3. "Perform reset" A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC
4. Start the engine - do not drive off. Dynamic Stability Control.
5. Reset tire inflation pressure:"Perform
reset".
6. Drive away.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
104
Online
Safety Controls
Actions in the event of a flat tire A vehicle with an average load has a possible
driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.
Normal tires A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐
1. Identify the damaged tire. ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during
Do this by checking the air pressure in all braking, a longer braking distance and different
four tires. self-steering properties. Adjust your driving
style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,
is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may
potholes, etc.
not have been initialized. In this case, initi‐
alize the system. Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
If an identification is not possible, please
trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐
contact the service center.
ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐
2. Rectify the flat tire on the damaged wheel. ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.
Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility System, Continued driving with a flat tire
may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In
this case, have the electronics checked at the Drive moderately and do not exceed a
next opportunity and have them replaced if speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
needed. Your car handles differently when you lose tire
inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is re‐
Run-flat tires duced when braking, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will
Maximum speed change.◀
You may continue driving with a damaged tire Final tire failure
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Vibrations or loud noises while driving
Continued driving with a flat tire can indicate the final failure of a tire. Reduce
speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: could come loose and cause an accident. Do
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ not continue driving and contact your service
vers. center.◀
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
Required tire inflation pressure check
the next opportunity.
message
A Check Control message is displayed in the
following situations
is shown to be correct, it is possible that
the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform ▷ The system has detected a wheel change,
a reset. In that case, carry out a reset. but no reset was done.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of ▷ Inflation was not carried out according to
tire inflation pressure: specifications.
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire ▷ The tire inflation pressure has fallen below
inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐ the level of the last confirmation.
ing style and road conditions. In this case:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
105
Online
Controls Safety
▷ Check the tire pressure and correct as by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
needed. placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
▷ Carry out a reset of the system after a tire vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
change. indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
System limits proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
The system does not function properly if a re‐
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
reported though tire inflation pressures are
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
correct.
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
The tire inflation pressure depends on the the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the should stop and check your tires as soon as
sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐
increasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
inflation pressure is reduced when the tire tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
temperature falls again. These circumstances tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐
may cause a warning when temperatures fall ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
very sharply. vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
Malfunction proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
The yellow warning lamp flashes and responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
then lights up continuously. A Check even if under-inflation has not reached the
Control message is displayed. No flat level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de‐ tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
tected. been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐
cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐
Display in the following situations: ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted: tor is combined with the low tire pressure
have the service center check it if needed. telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐
tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by
minute and then remain continuously illumi‐
nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
Reset the system again. function exists. When the malfunction indicator
▷ Interference through systems or devices is illuminated, the system may not be able to
with the same radio frequency: after leav‐ detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
ing the area of the interference, the system TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
automatically becomes active again. reasons, including the installation of replace‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
Declaration according to NHTSA/ that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
System tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
Each tire, including the spare (if provided) on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐ or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
flated to the inflation pressure recommended to continue to function properly.
Informati
onPr ovi dedby:
106
Online
Safety Controls
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 4. Start the engine - do not drive off.
5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset".
The concept 6. Drive away.
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss The initialization is completed while driving,
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐ which can be interrupted at any time.
tween the individual wheels while driving.
The initialization automatically continues when
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the driving resumes.
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
the corresponding wheel changes. This will be Indication of a flat tire
detected and reported as a flat tire.
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
The system does not measure the actual infla‐
Check Control message is displayed.
tion pressure in the tires.
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire
Functional requirements inflation pressure.
The system must have been initialized when 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐ Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐ vers.
sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
regular tires or run-flat tires.
every tire or wheel change.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 182, are la‐
Status display beled with a circular symbol containing the
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., Do not continue driving without run-flat
whether or not the FTM is active. tires
1. "Vehicle info" Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not

equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving
2. "Vehicle status"
may result in serious accidents.◀
3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
The status is displayed.
bility Control is switched on if needed.
Initialization System limits

When initializing the once set inflation tire
Sudden tire damage
pressures serve as reference values in order to
detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐ Sudden serious tire damage caused by
firming the tire inflation pressures. external circumstances cannot be recognized
in advance.◀
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains. A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all
On the Control Display: four tires will not be recognized. Therefore,
check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
1. "Vehicle info"
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
2. "Vehicle status" the following situations:
3. "Perform reset" ▷ When the system has not been initialized.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovidedby:
107
Online
Controls Safety
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road A vehicle with an average load has a possible
surface. driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.
▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting). ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during
▷ When driving with snow chains. braking, a longer braking distance and different
self-steering properties. Adjust your driving
Actions in the event of a flat tire style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐
neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,
Normal tires potholes, etc.
1. Identify the damaged tire. Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐
four tires.
ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize Continued driving with a flat tire
the system. Drive moderately and do not exceed a
If an identification is not possible, please speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
contact the service center. Your car handles differently when you lose tire
2. Rectify the flat tire on the damaged wheel. inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is re‐
duced when braking, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will
Run-flat tires
change.◀
Maximum speed Final tire failure
You may continue driving with a damaged tire Vibrations or loud noises while driving
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. can indicate the final failure of a tire. Reduce
speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire
Continued driving with a flat tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: not continue driving and contact your service
center.◀
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
Intelligent Safety
the next opportunity.
The concept
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
the driver assistance system.
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system. Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐
telligent Safety consists of one or more sys‐
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tems that can help prevent a imminent colli‐
tire inflation pressure:
sion. These systems are active automatically
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire every time the engine is started using the
inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐ Start/Stop button:
ing style and road conditions.
I
nfor mat ionPr
ovi
dedby:
108
Online
Safety Controls
▷ Front-end collision warning with City Brak‐ Intelligent Safety button

ing function, refer to page 109.
▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 112.
Camera
Hints
The system does not serve as a substi‐
tute for the driver's personal judgment of the
traffic situation.
Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐
cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐
dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀
Adapting your speed and driving style The camera is found near the interior rearview
mirror.
The displays and warnings of the system
do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
adapt his or her driving speed and style to the terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
traffic conditions.◀
Switching on/off
Be alert
The Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
Due to system limitations, warnings may
cally active after every departure.
be not issued at all, or may be issued late or
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and Press button: the systems are turned
ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk off. The LED goes out.
of an accident.◀ Press button: the systems are turned on. The
LED lights up.
Tow-starting and towing
For tow-starting or towing, switch off the Settings can be made on the Control Display.
Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐
tions of the individual braking systems might
lead to accidents.◀ Front-end collision warning
with City Braking function
At a glance
The concept
Button in the vehicle The ystem can help prevent accidents. If an
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
help reduce the collision speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐
ently if needed.
The automatic braking intervention is done
with limited force and duration.
A camera in the area of the rearview mirror
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovcontrols
idedby: the system.
109
Online
Controls Safety
The front-end collision warning is available Be alert

even if cruise control has been deactivated. Due to system limitations, warnings may
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle be not issued at all, or may be issued late or
intentionally the collision warning is delayed improperly. Therefore, always be alert and
avoiding false alarm. ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk
of an accident.◀
General information
The system warns at two levels of an imminent
danger of collision at speeds from approx. For tow-starting or towing, switch off the
3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐
the current driving situation. tions of the individual braking systems might
lead to accidents.◀
Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to
35 mph/60 km/h.
At a glance
Detection range
Button in the vehicle
It responds to objects if they are detected by

the system. Intelligent Safety button
Hints Camera
traffic situation.
Adapting your speed and driving style

The displays and warnings of the system The camera is found near the interior rearview
do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to mirror.
adapt his or her driving speed and style to the
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
110
Online
Safety Controls
Switching on/off Prewarning

This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the
Switching on automatically impending danger of a collision or the distance
The system is automatically active after every to the vehicle ahead is too small.
driving-off. The driver must intervene actively when there
is a prewarning.
Switch off
Press button: the system is switched Acute warning with braking function
off. The LED goes out. Warning of the imminent danger of a collision
Re-press button: the system is switched on. when the vehicle approaches another object at
The LED lights up. a relatively high differential speed.
The driver must intervene actively when there
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
Setting the warning time
assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐
The warning time can be set via iDrive. vention in a possible risk of collision.
1. "Settings" Acute warnings can also be triggered without
2. "Frontal Coll. Warning" previous prewarning.
3. Activate the desired time on the Control
Display.
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
rently in use.
ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐
ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on
Warning with braking function
the brake pedal. The system can assist with
some braking intervention if there is risk of a
Display
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐ come to a complete stop.
nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐
Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐
ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display.
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may
Symbol Measure be shut down.
The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐ The braking intervention is executed only if
ing. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on
and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐
Brake and increase distance.
vated.
The vehicle flashes red and an The braking intervention can be interrupted by
acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐ stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
ing. tively moving the steering wheel.
You are requested to intervene by Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
braking or make an evasive maneu‐ of the detection range and functional restric‐
ver. tions are to be considered.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
111
Online
Controls Safety
System limits Pedestrian warning with city

Detection range
braking function
The system's detection potential is limited. The concept
Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐ The ystem can help prevent accidents with pe‐
sued late. destrians.
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐ The system issues a warning in the city driving
tected: speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach lision with pedestrians and includes a braking
them at high speed. function.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of The camera in the area of the rearview mirror
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles. controls the system.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
General information
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
In daylight the system warns of possible colli‐
sions with pedestrians at speeds from about
Functional limitations
6 mph/10 km/h to about 35 mph/60 km/h
The system may not be fully functional in the shortly before a collision the system supports
following situations: you with a braking intervention.
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ Under those circumstances it reacts to people
fall. who are within the detection range of the sys‐
▷ In tight curves. tem.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF. Detection range
▷ If the field of view of the camera in the mir‐
ror is dirty or obscured.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop knob.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
▷ If there is constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
low in the sky.
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas.
Warning sensitivity
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
vehicle.
e.g. the warning time, the more warnings are
displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐ ▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
cess of false warnings. left.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
112
Online
Safety Controls
the extended area only if they are moving in Intelligent Safety button
the direction of the central area.
Camera
Hints
traffic situation.
Adapting your speed and driving style

The camera is found near the interior rearview
The displays and warnings of the system mirror.
do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
adapt his or her driving speed and style to the
Be alert Switching on/off

Due to system limitations, warnings may
be not issued at all, or may be issued late or Switching on automatically
improperly. Therefore, always be alert and The system is automatically active after every
ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk driving-off.
of an accident.◀

Switch off
For tow-starting or towing, switch off the Press button: the systems are turned
Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐ off. The LED goes out.
tions of the individual braking systems might Press button: the systems are turned on. The
lead to accidents.◀ LED lights up.
At a glance Warning with braking function
Button in the vehicle Display

If a collision with a person detected in this way
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐
nal sounds.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an

evasive maneuver.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
113
Online
Controls Safety
Braking intervention ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐

The warning prompts the driver himself/herself fall.
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ ▷ In tight curves.
ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ ▷ If the driving stability control systems are
ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on deactivated, e.g. DSC OFF.
the brake pedal. The system can assist with
▷ If the camera viewing field or the front
some braking intervention if there is risk of a
windshield are dirty or covered.
collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus
come to a complete stop. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop knob.
Manual transmission: During a braking inter‐
vention up to a complete stop, the engine may ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
be shut down. ately after vehicle shipment.
The braking intervention is executed only if ▷ If there is constant blinding effects be‐
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ low in the sky.
vated. ▷ When it is dark outside.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel. Lane departure warning
Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
of the detection range and functional restric‐ The concept
tions are to be considered. Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts
you when the vehicle on streets with lane
System limits markings is about to leave the lane. This
speed, depending on the country version, is
Detection range between 35 mph/55 km/h and
The detection potential of the camera is lim‐ 45 mph/70 km/h.
ited. When switching on the system below this
Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐ speed, a message is displayed in the instru‐
sued late. ment cluster.
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐ The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in
tected: the event of warnings. The time of the warning
may vary depending on the current driving sit‐
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
uation.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
The system does not provide a warning if the
because of the viewing angle or contour.
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than Hints
32 in/80 cm. Personal responsibility
The system cannot serve as a substitute
Functional limitations
for the driver's personal judgment of the
The system may not be fully functional or may course of the road and the traffic situation.
not be available in the following situations:
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
114
Online
Safety Controls
In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steer‐ Display in the instrument cluster
ing wheel, as you may lose control of the vehi‐
▷ Lines: system is activated.
cle.◀
▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking
was detected and warnings can be
At a glance issued.
Button in the vehicle

Issued warning
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has
been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐
brating.
If the turn signal is set before changing the
lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning
The warning ends:
Lane departure warning ▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
▷ When returning to your own lane.
▷ When braking hard.
Camera
▷ When using the turn signal.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
markings such as in construction areas.
The camera is found near the interior rearview ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
mirror. ice, dirt or water.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
objects.
Switching on/off ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
Press button. front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
▷ Off: the LED goes out. rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
use. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovidedby:
115
Online
Controls Safety
Brake force display After travel has begun, the system is trained
about the driver, so that increasing lack of
The concept alertness or fatigue can be detected.
This procedure takes the following criteria into
account:
▷ Personal driving style, e.g., steering behav‐
ior.
▷ Driving conditions, e.g., length of trip.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the
system is active and can display a recommen‐
dation to take a break.
▷ During normal brake application, the bot‐ Break recommendation

tom brake lights light up. If the driver becomes increasingly less alert or
▷ During heavy brake application, the top fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control
brake lights light up in addition. Display with the recommendation to take a
break.
A recommendation to take a break is displayed
Attentiveness assistant only once during an uninterrupted trip.
After a break, another recommendation to take
The concept a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
The system can detect increasing lack of alert‐ mately 45 minutes.
ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo‐
notonous journeys, e.g., on highways. In this System limits
situation, it is recommended that the driver The function may be limited in the following
takes a break. situations, for instance, and will either output
an incorrect warning or no warning at all:
Note ▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
Personal responsibility ▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
The system cannot act as a substitute for about 43 mph/70 km/h.
the personal assessment of one's physical ▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
state and may not detect an increasing lack of rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
alertness or fatigue or may not detect it cor‐ ▷ In active driving situations, such as when
rectly. Therefore, make sure that the driver is changing lanes frequently.
rested and alert; otherwise, risks may be de‐
tected too late and an accident be caused as a ▷ When the road surface is poor.
result.◀ ▷ In the event of strong side winds.
Function
The system is activated each time the engine
is started and cannot be switched off.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
116
Online
Driving stability control systems Controls
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
tions such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Within
This chapter describes all standard, country- the physical limits DSC helps to keep the vehi‐
specific and optional features offered with the cle on a steady course by reducing engine
series. It also describes features that are not speed and by applying brakes to the individual
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to wheels.
also applies to safety-related functions and Note
provisions must be observed when using the Adjust your driving style to the situation
respective features and systems. An appropriate driving style is always the
responsibility of the driver.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, not
Antilock Brake System ABS even with DSC.
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety
braking. margin by driving in a risky manner.◀
The vehicle contains its steering power even Do not deactivate DSC when driving with
during full brake applications, thus increasing roof load
active safety.
Do not deactivate Dynamic Stability Control
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ DSC when driving with roof load, e.g. roof-
gine. mounted luggage rack.
Otherwise, driving safety is not given in driv‐
ing-critical situation due to the elevated center
Brake assistant of gravity.◀
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the greatest possible Overview
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐
tance to a minimum during emergency stop. Button in the vehicle
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the emergency stop.
DSC Dynamic Stability

Control
The concept
DSC OFF button
DSC prevents traction loss in the power
wheels when driving off and accelerating.
I
nformati
onPr
ovi
dedby:
117
Online
Controls Driving stability control systems
Indicator/warning lights The system ensures maximum headway on

special road conditions or loose road surfaces,
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐
e.g., unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐
trols the drive and braking forces.
what limited driving stability.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has
Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
failed.
provides maximum traction. Driving stability is
limited during acceleration and when driving in
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF curves.
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is Therefore drive with appropriate caution.
reduced during acceleration and when driving You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
in curves. under the following special circumstances:
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
again as soon as possible. snow-covered roads.
▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or
Deactivating DSC
driving off from loose grounds.
Press and hold this button but not lon‐
▷ When driving with snow chains.
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐
Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
strument cluster and displays DSC OFF.
Traction Control
The DSC system is switched off.
The steering and, depending on the equip‐ Activating DTC
ment, suspension are tuned for sporty driving. Press button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
Activating DSC ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC
Press button. OFF lights up.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator

lamp go out. Deactivating DTC
Press button again.
Indicator/warning lights TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐ tor lamp go out.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is
deactivated. xDrive
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐
hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC
DTC Dynamic Traction further optimize traction and driving dynamics.
Control The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐
tributes the drive forces to the front and rear
The concept axles as demanded by the driving situation and
road surface.
The DTC system is a version of the DSC where
forward momentum is optimized.
I
nfor
mat ionPr
ovi
dedby:
118
Online
Dynamic Damping Control Servotronic

This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐ The Servotronic varies the steering force re‐
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐ quired to turn the wheels in accordance with
eling on uneven road surfaces. the vehicle speed. At low speeds, the steering
The system enhances driving dynamics and force is strongly supported, i. e. during steer‐
comfort fitting road surface and driving style. ing, low force is required. As the speed in‐
creases, the assistance of the steering force is
Programs reduced.
The system offers several different programs. Furthermore, the steering force adapts accord‐
ing to the driving program, so that a direct,
Select the programs via the Driving Dynamics
sporty feel and/or comfortable steering is con‐
Control, refer to page 119.
veyed.
SPORT
Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐ Driving Dynamics Control
sorbers for greater driving agility.
The concept
SPORT+
The Driving Dynamics Control helps to fine-
Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐ tune the vehicle's settings and features. Vari‐
sorbers for greater driving agility when driving ous programs can be selected for this purpose.
with limited driving stabilization. The Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC
OFF buttons can each be used to activate a
COMFORT/ECO PRO program.
Balanced control of the vehicle.
Overview
Variable sport steering Button in the vehicle

The variable sport steering increases the
steering angle of the front wheels at large
steering wheel angles, e.g., in tight curves or
when parking. Steering becomes more direct.
It also varies the force required to turn the
wheels in accordance with the vehicle speed.
This results in a sporty steering response. In
addition, it becomes easier to steer during
parking and maneuvering.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
119
Online
Operating the programs Activating SPORT+

Press button repeatedly until SPORT+
Press button Program
appears in the instrument cluster and
DSC OFF the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up.
TRACTION
Automatic program change
SPORT+
When activating cruise control, the program
SPORT
automatically switches to SPORT mode.
COMFORT
ECO PRO Indicator/warning lights
SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Automatic program change The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up:
The system may automatically switch to COM‐ Dynamic Traction Control is activated.
FORT in the following situations:
▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control. SPORT
▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Stability Control. Depending on the equipment, consistently
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire. sporty tuning of the suspension, steering, and
▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐ engine control for greater driving agility with
TION or DSC OFF mode. maximum driving stabilization.
The program can be configured to individual
DSC OFF specifications. The configuration is stored for
When DSC OFF, refer to page 118, is active, the profile currently in use.
driving stability is limited during acceleration
and when driving in curves. Activating SPORT
Press button repeatedly until SPORT
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster.
When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has
maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC Configuring SPORT
Dynamic Traction Control, refer to page 118, is
When the display is activated on the Control
activated. Driving stability is limited during ac‐
Display, refer to page 121, the SPORT driving
celeration and when driving in curves.
mode can be set to individual specifications.
SPORT+ ▷ Activating SPORT.
Sporty driving with optimized suspension and ▷ "Configure SPORT"
adapted engine control with limited driving sta‐ ▷ Configuring the SPORT driving mode.
bilization. SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. vated:
The driver handles several of the stabilization 1. "Settings"
tasks.
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Configure SPORT"
I
nfor
mat
i 4.r
onP ovConfigure
dedby: driving mode.
i
120
Online
This configuration is retrieved when the Displays

SPORT driving mode is activated.
Program selection
COMFORT Pressing the button displays a
For a balanced tuning with maximum driving list of the selectable programs.
stabilization. Depending on your vehicle's op‐
tional features, the list in the in‐
Activating COMFORT strument cluster can differ from
Press button repeatedly until COM‐ the illustration shown.
FORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster. Selected program
In certain situations, the system automatically The instrument cluster displays
changes to the NORMAL program, automatic the selected program.
program change, refer to page 120.
ECO PRO
ECO PRO, refer to page 162, provides consis‐
tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for Display on the Control Display
maximum range with maximum driving stabili‐ Program changes can be displayed on the
zation. Control Display.
Comfort functions and the engine controller 1. "Settings"
are adjusted.
2. "Control display"
The program can be configured to individual
3. "Driving mode info"
specifications.
Activating ECO PRO

Drive-off assistant
Press button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument This system supports driving off on inclines.
cluster. The parking brake is not required.
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
Configuring ECO PRO brake.
1. Activate ECO PRO. 2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
out delay.
2. "Configure ECO PRO"
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
Make the desired settings.
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Configuring driving program For vehicles with respective equipment ver‐

sions, the possible holding duration amounts
Settings can be made for the following driving
to 2 minutes.
programs in Driving mode:
Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer
▷ SPORT, refer to page 120.
is used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.
▷ ECO PRO, refer to page 163.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
121
Online
Driving off without delay

After releasing the foot brake, start driv‐
ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant
will not hold the vehicle in place for more than
approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin to
roll back.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
122
Online
Driving comfort Controls
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options Overview
This chapter describes all standard, country- Buttons on the steering wheel
series. It also describes features that are not Press button Function
the selected options or country versions. This System on/off, interrupt
systems. The respectively applicable country Store speed
Resume speed
Cruise control rocker switch: change, hold,

store speed
The concept
The system maintains a preset speed via the Controls
buttons on the steering wheel. The system
brakes on downhill gradients if engine braking Switching on
is insufficient.
Press button on the steering wheel.
General information
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
Depending on the driving settings, the features
current speed.
of the cruise control can change in certain
areas. Cruise control can be used.
Hints Switch off
Unfavorable conditions Deactivated or interrupted system
Do not use the system if unfavorable With deactivated or interrupted system

conditions make it impossible to drive at a con‐ use your brakes, steering and moves as usual
stant speed, e.g.: to avoid the chance of an accident.◀
▷ On winding roads. Press button.

▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or ▷ If active: press twice.
on a loose road surface. ▷ If interrupted: press once.
Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi‐ The displays go out. The stored desired speed
cle and cause an accident.◀ is deleted.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
123
Online
Controls Driving comfort
Interrupting When the system is switched on, the current

speed is maintained and stored as the desired
When active, press the button.
speed.
This is displayed, refer to page 125, in the
The system is automatically interrupted if:
speedometer and briefly in the instrument
▷ The brakes are applied. cluster.
▷ The clutch pedal is depressed for a few When cruise control is maintained or stored,
seconds or released while a gear is not en‐ DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be turned
gaged. on if needed.
▷ The gear engaged is too high for the cur‐
rent speed. Changing the speed
▷ Selector lever position D is disengaged. Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated until the desired speed is set.
or DSC is deactivated. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
▷ DSC is actively controlling stability. vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving
Dynamics Control. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
Maintaining, storing, and changing the increases or decreases by approx.
speed 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
Hints past the point of resistance, the desired
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
Adjusting the desired speed
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Modify desired speed to road conditions
The maximum speed that can be set de‐
and be ready to brake at all times; otherwise,
pends on the vehicle.
there is the risk of an accident.◀
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐
ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐
Maintaining/storing the speed
celerates the vehicle without requiring
Press button. pressure on the accelerator pedal.
Or: After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐
hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Resuming the desired speed

Press button.
The stored speed is reached and maintained.
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐

terrupted.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
124
Online
Displays in the instrument cluster The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐
stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.
Indicator lamp 6 ft/2 m.
Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐ An acoustic warning is first given:
ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐ ▷ By the front sensors and the two rear cor‐
ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐ ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
tem is switched on. ▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.
5 ft/1.50 m.
Desired speed To ensure full functionality:
▷ The marking lights up green: ▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., with stickers,
the system is active. bicycle racks.
▷ The marking lights up or‐ ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
ange: the system has been ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
interrupted. spray the sensors for long periods and
▷ The marking does not light up: the system maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
is switched off.
Hints
Brief status display Personal responsibility
Selected desired speed. Even an active system does not relieve
the driver from personal responsibility while
driving.
If --- appears briefly on the display for Check Technically the system has its limits, it cannot
Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐ independently react to all traffic situations.
tem requirements are currently not ready for
Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe
operations.
the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and
react when needed - risk of accident.◀
PDC Park Distance Control Avoid driving fast with PDC

Avoid approaching an object too fast.
The concept
Avoid driving off fast while PDC is not yet ac‐
PDC is a support when parking. When you
tive.
slowly approach an object in the rear - or also
in the front of the vehicle if the feature is availa‐ For technical reasons, the system may other‐
ble - then the object is reported through: wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀
▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.
General information
Ultrasound sensors in the bumpers measure
the distances from objects.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
125
Online
Overview With front PDC: switching on/off

manually
With front PDC: button in vehicle Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.

The rearview camera image is displayed when
the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the
button.
Display
PDC Park Distance Control Signal tones

When approaching an object, an intermittent
sound indicates the position of the object. E. g.
Switching on/off
if an object is detected to the left rear of the
vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear
Switching on automatically
speaker.
PDC switches on automatically in the following
The shorter the distance to the object, the
situations:
shorter the intervals.
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged
If the distance to a detected object is less than
when the engine is running.
approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is
The rearview camera also switches on. sounded.
▷ If equipped with parking assistant: when With front PDC: if objects are located both in
obstacles are detected behind or in front of front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating
the vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower continuous signal is sounded.
than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h.
The signal tone is switched off, when selector
You may turn off automatic activation: lever position P is engaged on vehicles with
1. "Settings" Steptronic transmission.
2. "Parking"
Volume
3. Select setting.
The volume of the PDC signal tone can be ad‐
Settings are stored for the profile currently justed similar to the sound and volume set‐
in use. tings of the radio.
Automatic deactivation during forward use.
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving Visual warning
distance or speed is exceeded.
The approach of the vehicle to an object can
Switch the system back on if needed. be shown on the Control Display. Objects that
are farther away are already displayed on the
Control Display before a signal sounds.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
126
Online
A display appears as soon as Park Distance False warnings

Control (PDC) is activated. PDC may issue a warning under the following
The range of the sensors is represented in the conditions even though there is no obstacle
colors green, yellow and red. within the detection range:
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐ ▷ In heavy rain.
played, the reel can be made to PDC: ▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered
"Rear view camera" with ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
System limits
▷ On rough road surfaces.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement ▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed
bumps.
Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
the following circumstances: ▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐
▷ For small children and animals.
rages.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.
▷ In automatic car washes.
coats.
▷ Through heavy pollution.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
machines. sweeping machines, high pressure steam
cleaners or neon lights.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position. The malfunction is signaled by a continu‐
ous tone alternating between the front and
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
rear speakers. As soon as the malfunction
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
due to other ultrasound sources is no lon‐
treme heat or strong wind.
ger present, the system is again fully func‐
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other tional.
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. Malfunction
▷ With moving objects. A Check Control message is displayed.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded
ledges or cargo. area on the Control Display.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. PDC has failed. Have the system checked.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure To ensure full functionality:
such as fences. ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces. ▷ dimmedDo not put any stickers on sen‐
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can sors.
move into the blind area of the sensors before ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
or after a continuous tone sounds. spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
127
Online
Rearview camera Clean the camera lens, refer to page 214.
The concept Switching on/off

The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area Switching on automatically
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐
Display. tion P R.
Hints Automatic deactivation during forward

Check the traffic situation as well travel
Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ The system switches off when a certain driving
hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐ distance or speed is exceeded.
dent could result from road users or objects Switch the system back on if needed.
that are not lidtured by the camera.◀
Switching on/off manually
At a glance Press button.
Button in the vehicle ▷ On: the LED lights up.

The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
The rearview camera image is displayed when
the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the
button.
Switching the view via iDrive

With PDC activated:
Rearview camera "Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Camera Display on the Control Display
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The trunk lid is fully closed.
Activating assistance functions

More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
▷ Parking aid lines
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
tail gate. The image quality may be impaired by "Parking aid lines"
dirt. Lanes and turning radius are indicated.
I
nfor mat i
onPr
ovidedby:
128
Online
▷ Obstacle marking Obstacle marking

"Obstacle marking"
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.
Pathway lines
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image

of the rearview camera.
Their colored margins match the markings of
the PDC. This simplifies estimation of the dis‐
▷ Pathway lines can be superimposed on the tance to the object shown.
image of the rearview camera.
▷ They help you to estimate how much Parking using pathway and turning
space is needed when parking and maneu‐ radius lines
vering on level pavement. 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐
▷ They are dependent on the current steer‐ dius lines lead to within the limits of the
ing angle and are continuously adjusted to parking space.
the steering wheel movements.
Turning circle lines
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where

the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning radius line.
▷ Turning circle lines can only be superim‐

posed on the rearview camera image to‐
gether with pathway lines.
▷ They show the course of the smallest pos‐
sible turning radius on a level road.
▷ Only one turning radius line is displayed af‐
ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer‐
tain angle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
129
Online
Display settings The system supports parking in the following

situations:
Brightness ▷ When parking parallel to the road.
With the rearview camera switched on: ▷ When reverse parking diagonally to the
1. Select the symbol. road.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
is reached, and press the controller. on both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐
Contrast sible parking line and takes control of steering
With the rearview camera switched on: during the parking procedure.
When parking, also take note of the visual and
1. Select the symbol.
acoustic information and instructions issued
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting by the PDC, the parking assistant and the rear‐
is reached, and press the controller. view camera and react accordingly.
A component of the parking assistant is the
System limits PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 125.
Detection of objects
Hints
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by Personal responsibility
the system. Even an active system does not relieve
Assistance functions also take into account the driver from personal responsibility while
data of the PDC. driving.
Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer to Technically the system has its limits, it cannot
page 125. independently react to all traffic situations.
The objects displayed on the Control Display Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe
under certain circumstances are closer than the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and
they appear. Do not estimate the distance from react when needed - risk of accident.◀
the objects on the display. Changes to the parking space
Changes to the parking space after it was
measured are not taken into account by the
Parking assistant system.
The concept Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
vene; otherwise, there is the risk of an acci‐
dent.◀
Transporting cargo
Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter
of the vehicle is not taken into account by the
system during the parking procedure.
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐
vene; otherwise, there is the risk of an acci‐
I
nfor
mat
i dent.◀
onProvi
dedby:
130
Online
Curbs ▷ Parking brake released.

The parking assistant may steer the vehi‐ ▷ When parking in parking spaces on the
cle over or onto curb if need be. driver's side, the corresponding turn signal
Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ must be set where applicable.
vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehi‐
cle may become damaged.◀ Overview
An engine that has been switched off by the Button in the vehicle
Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐
cally when the parking assistant is activated.
Requirements
For measuring parking spaces

▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Parking assistant
Suitable parking space
General information: Ultrasound sensors
▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length
of 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
Parallel parking to the road:
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx.
2.6 ft/0.8 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
The four ultrasound sensors for measuring
Diagonal parking:
parking spaces are located in the front and rear
▷ Width of gap between two objects: your on the side of the vehicle.
vehicle's width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m up
To ensure full functionality:
to maximum 16 ft/5 m.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
▷ Minimum depth: your vehicle's length.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
The depth of diagonal parking spaces must
spray the sensors for long periods and
be estimated by the driver. Dur to technical
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
limitations, the system can approximate
the depth of diagonal parking spaces only. ▷ Do not put stickers over sensors.
Regarding the parking procedure

▷ Doors and trunk lid closed.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
131
Online
Switching on/off ▷ Symbol P, refer to Arrow, on the vehicle il‐

lustrated. Parking assistant is activated and
Switching on with the button search for parking space active.
Press button. ▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to the
The LED lights up.
vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant
The current status of the parking space search is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐
is indicated on the Control Display. lighted.
Parking assistant is activated automatically. ▷ If a diagonal or parallel parking space is
clearly detected, the system automatically
Switching on with the reverse gear adjusts the suitable parking method. In the
case of parking spaces suitable for parallel
Shift into reverse.
and diagonal parking, a selection menu is
The current status of the parking space search displayed. In this case, the desired parking
is indicated on the Control Display. method must be selected manually.
To activate: "Parking Assistant" ▷ The parking procedure is ac‐
tive. Steering control has
Switch off been taken over by system.
The system can be deactivated as follows:
▷ Press button.
▷ Parking space search is always active
▷ Switch off the ignition. whenever the vehicle is moving forward
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐
Display on the Control Display activated. When the system is deactivated,
the displays on the Control Display are
System activated/deactivated shown in gray.
Symbol Meaning Parking using the parking assistant

Check the traffic situation as well
Gray: the system is not available.
Louds noises outside and inside the ve‐
White: the system is available but
hicle can drown out the parking assistant's and
not activated.
PDC's signals.
The system is activated. Check the traffic situation around the vehicle
with your own eyes; otherwise, there is a dan‐
System status ger of an accident.◀
1. Switch on the parking assistant and acti‐
vate it if needed.
The status of the parking space search is
indicated on the Control Display.
2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
The best possible parking position will
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovcome
idedbafter
y: gear change on the stationary
132
Online
vehicle - wait for the automatic steering Follow the instructions on the Control Display
wheel move. to do this.
The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
cated on the Control Display. System limits
3. Adjust the parking position yourself if
No parking assistance
needed.
The parking assistant does not offer assis‐
Interrupting manually tance in the following situations:
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any ▷ In tight curves.
time: ▷ When DSC is deactivated.
▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol
on the Control Display. Functional limitations
▷ Press button. The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
Interrupting automatically roads.
The system is interrupted automatically in the ▷ On slippery ground.
following situations: ▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if ▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
he takes over steering. parking space.
▷ If a gear is selected that does not match
the instruction on the Control Display. Limits of ultrasonic measurement
▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
6 mph/10 km/h. the following circumstances:
▷ Possible on snow-covered or slippery road ▷ For small children and animals.
surfaces. ▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to coats.
overcome, such as curbs. ▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud
arise. machines.
▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
clearances that are too small. aged or out of position.
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
or the time taken for parking is exceeded. high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
▷ If DSC is being deactivated. treme heat or strong wind.
▷ When switching to another function on the ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
Control Display. vehicles.
A Check Control message is displayed. ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
Resume ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐ ledges or cargo.
tinued if needed. I
nformationPr
ovidedby:
133
Online
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.

▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before
or after a continuous tone sounds.
The parking assistant may identify parking
spaces that are not suitable for parking.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
134
Online
Climate control Controls
Climate control
Automatic climate control
1 Seat heating, left 57 6 Temperature

2 Vent settings 7 Seat heating, right 57
3 Rear window defroster 8 Cooling function
4 Air flow 9 Recirculated-air mode
5 AUTO program 10 Interior temperature sensor
Hints the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐

dow condensation increases.◀
Sufficient ventilation
When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐
tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐
nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐
culated-air mode; otherwise the airIquality
nformat in
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
135
Online
Controls Climate control
Climate control functions in detail The cooling function, refer to page 136, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
Manual air distribution gram.
Turn the wheel to select the de‐
Convertible program
sired program or the desired in‐
termediate setting. When the convertible top is open, the
convertible program is activated as well. In the
convertible program, the automatic climate
control is optimized for driving with the
▷ Windows.
convertible top open. In addition, the air flow is
▷ Upper body region. increased as the vehicle speed increases.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and foot‐ The efficiency of the convertible program can
well. be greatly enhanced by installing the wind de‐
▷ Footwell. flector.
Defrosts windows and removes Temperature

condensation
Turn the ring to set the desired
Direct the air distribution toward windows, in‐ temperature.
crease the air flow and temperature, and, if
needed, use the cooling function.
Rear window defroster The automatic climate control reaches this

Press button. temperature as quickly as possible, if needed
The rear window defroster switches by increasing the cooling or heating output,
off automatically after a certain period of time. and then keeps it constant.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
Air flow, manual
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
Press the left or right side of the but‐ just the set temperature.
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
Cooling function
The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐
duced automatically to save battery power. The car's interior can only be cooled with the
engine running.
AUTO program Press button.
Press button. The air will be cooled and dehumidi‐
Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐ fied and, depending on the temperature set‐
ture are controlled automatically. ting, warmed again.
Depending on the selected temperature and Depending on the weather, the windshield and
outside influences, the air is directed to the side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
windshield, side windows, upper body, and gine is started.
into the footwell. The cooling function is switched on automati‐
cally with the AUTO program.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
136
Online
When using the automatic climate control, culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in
condensation water, refer to page 158, devel‐ the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐
ops that exits underneath the vehicle. dow condensation increases.◀
Recirculated-air mode Switching the system on/off

You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ Switch off
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
Press the left button for the minimum
system then recirculates the air currently
speed.
within the vehicle.
Press button repeatedly to select an
Switching on
operating mode:
Press any button except
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously. ▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply ▷ Seat heating.
of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐
nently blocked. Microfilter
Recirculated air mode switches off automati‐ In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐
cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐ crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air.
tain amount of time in order to avoid window
This filter should be replaced during scheduled
fogging.
maintenance, refer to page 193, of your vehi‐
If the windows fog over, switch off recircu‐ cle.
lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if
needed.
tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐
nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
137
Online
Automatic climate control with enhanced features
1 Seat heating, left 57 10 Air distribution, right

2 Temperature, left 11 Air flow, AUTO intensity
3 AUTO program 12 Air distribution, left
4 Display 13 Rear window defroster
5 Maximum cooling 14 Interior temperature sensor — always keep
6 Temperature, right clear
7 Seat heating, right 57 15 Defrosts windows and removes condensa‐

tion
8 Cooling function
9 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
lated-air mode
Hints Climate control functions in detail

Temperature
tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐ Turn the ring to set the desired
nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐ temperature.
culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in
the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐
The automatic climate control reaches this
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed
I
nfor
mat
ionProvi
dedby:
138
Online
by increasing the cooling or heating output, Maximum cooling

and then keeps it constant.
Press button.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
perature, optimum air flow and air circulation
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
mode.
just the set temperature.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
AUTO program gion. The vents need to be open for this.
Press button. The function is available above an external
Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐ temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
ture are controlled automatically. engine running.
Adjust air flow with the program active.
Depending on the selected temperature,
AUTO intensity program and outside influen‐ Cooling function
ces, the air is directed to the windshield, side
The car's interior can only be cooled with the
windows, upper body, and into the footwell.
engine running.
The cooling function, refer to page 139, is
switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐ Press button.
gram. The air will be cooled and dehumidi‐
At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐ fied and, depending on the temperature set‐
trols the program so as to prevent window ting, warmed again.
condensation as much as possible.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
Intensity of the AUTO program
gine is started.
With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
matic intensity control can be changed.
cally with the AUTO program.
Press the left or right side of the but‐ When using the automatic climate control,
ton: decrease or increase the inten‐ condensation water, refer to page 158, devel‐
sity. ops that exits underneath the vehicle.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode
Convertible program You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
When the convertible top is open, the
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
convertible program is activated as well. In the
system then recirculates the air currently
convertible program, the automatic climate
within the vehicle.
control is optimized for driving with the
convertible top open. In addition, the air flow is Press button repeatedly to select an
increased as the vehicle speed increases. operating mode:
The efficiency of the convertible program can
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.
be greatly enhanced by installing the wind de‐
flector.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
139
Online
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air The selected air flow is shown on the display of
control: a sensor detects pollutants in the the automatic climate control.
outside air and shuts off automatically. The air flow of the automatic climate control
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the may be reduced automatically to save battery
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐ power.
manently blocked.
Recirculated air mode switches off automati‐ Rear window defroster
cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐ Press button.
tain amount of time in order to avoid window
The rear window defroster switches
fogging.
off automatically after a certain period of time.
If the windows are fogged over, switch off the
recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO
button to utilize the condensation sensor. Defrosts windows and removes
Make sure that air can flow to the windshield. condensation
Sufficient ventilation Press button.
When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐ Ice and condensation are quickly re‐
tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐ moved from the windshield and the front side
nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐ windows.
culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in For this purpose, point the side vents onto the
the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐ side windows as needed.
Adjust air flow with the program active.
If the windows are fogged over, you can also
Manual air distribution
switch on the cooling function or press the
Press button repeatedly to select a AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
program: sor.
▷ Upper body region.

Switching the system on/off
▷ Upper body region and footwell.
▷ Footwell. Switch off
▷ Windows and footwell: driver's side only. Press the left button for the minimum
▷ Windows, upper body region and footwell: speed.
driver's side only.
If the windows are fogged over, press the Switching on
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐ Press any button except
sor.
▷ Rear window defroster.
Air flow, manual ▷ Seat heating.
To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐
gram first.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
In external and recirculated air mode the mi‐
Press the left or right side of the but‐ crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust,
ton: decrease or increase air flow. pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
140
Online
This filter should be replaced during scheduled Ventilation in the rear

maintenance, refer to page 193, of your vehi‐
cle.
Ventilation
Front ventilation
▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening and

closing of the vents, arrow 1.
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar‐
row 2.
Toward blue: colder.
Toward red: warmer.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1. arrow 3.
▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
vents continuously, arrows 2.
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature in Parked-car ventilation
the upper body region, arrow 3.
Toward blue: colder. The concept
Toward red: warmer. The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐
cle interior and lowers its temperature, if
The set interior temperature for the driver
needed.
and passenger are not changed.
The system can be switched on and off at any
external temperature, either directly or by us‐
Adjusting the ventilation ing two preset reel-on times. It remains
▷ Ventilation for cooling: switched on for 30 minutes.
Direct vent in your direction when vehicle's Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
interior is too hot.
▷ Draft-free ventilation: Switching on/off directly
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you. On the Control Display:
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate comf. ventilation"
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
trol flashes if the system is switched on.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
141
Online
Preselecting the reel-on time

1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
4. Set the desired time.
Activating the reel-on time

1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2"
trol lights up when the reel-on time is acti‐
vated.
trol flashes when the system has been
switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐
vated.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
142
Online
Interior equipment Controls
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options Compatibility
This chapter describes all standard, country- If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
specific and optional features offered with the ing or in the instructions of the system
series. It also describes features that are not to be controlled, the system is gener‐
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to ally compatible with the universal garage door
the selected options or country versions. This opener.
also applies to safety-related functions and If you have any questions, please contact:
systems. The respectively applicable country ▷ Your service center.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
Universal Integrated Remote
Control Control elements on the interior
rearview mirror
The concept
The universal garage door opener can operate
up to 3 functions of remote-controlled sys‐
tems such as garage door drives or lighting
systems. The universal garage door opener re‐
places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters.
To operate the remote control, the buttons on
the interior rearview mirror must be program‐
med with the desired functions. The hand-held
transmitter for the particular system is required
▷ LED, arrow 1.
in order to program the remote control.
▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
During programming
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
During programming and before activat‐ quired for programming.
ing a device using the universal garage door
opener, ensure that there are no people, ani‐
mals or objects in the area of the remote-con‐ Programming
trolled device; otherwise, there is a risk of in‐
jury or damage. General information
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- 1. Switch on the ignition.
held transmitter.◀ 2. Initial setup:
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored Press and hold the left and right button on
functions for the sake of security. the interior rearview mirror simultaneously
for approximately 20 seconds until the LED
on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
143
Online
Controls Interior equipment
erases all programming of the buttons on rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then
the interior rearview mirror. stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐ features an alternating-code system. Flashing
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to and continuous illumination of the LED will re‐
8 cm away from the buttons of the interior peat for approximately 20 seconds.
rearview mirror. The required distance de‐ For systems with an alternating-code system,
pends on the manual transmitter. the universal garage door opener and the sys‐
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button tem also have to be synchronized.
of the desired function on the hand-held Please read the operating manual to find out
transmitter and the button to be program‐ how to synchronize the system.
med on the interior rearview mirror. The Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
LED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐ ond person.
gin flashing slowly.
To synchronize:
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing 1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
faster indicates that the button on the inte‐ mote-controlled system.
rior rearview mirror has been programmed. 2. Program the relevant button on the interior
If the LED does not flash faster after at rearview mirror as described.
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐ 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
tween the interior rearview mirror and the on the system being programmed. You
hand-held transmitter and repeat the step. have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
Several more attempts at different distan‐ 4. Hold down the programmed button on the
ces may be necessary. Wait at least interior rearview mirror for approximately
15 seconds between attempts. 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary,
Canada: if programming with the hand- repeat this step up to three times in order
held transmitter was interrupted, hold to finish synchronization. Once synchroni‐
down the interior rearview mirror button zation is complete, the programmed func‐
and repeatedly press and release the tion will be carried out.
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐
onds. Reprogramming individual buttons
6. To program other functions on other but‐ 1. Switch on the ignition.
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5. 2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐ button to be programmed.
rior rearview mirror buttons. 3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED
starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held
Special feature of the alternating- transmitter for the system to be controlled
code wireless system approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the
If you are unable to operate the system after buttons of the interior rearview mirror. The
repeated programming, please check if the required distance depends on the manual
system to be controlled features an alternat‐ transmitter.
ing-code system.
Read the system's operating manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior rear‐
view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior
Informat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
144
Online
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes
desired function on the hand-held trans‐ rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The
mitter. functions cannot be deleted individually.
5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐
rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap‐
idly. The LED flashing faster indicates that Digital compass
the button on the interior rearview mirror
has been programmed. The system can Overview
then be controlled by the button on the in‐
terior rearview mirror.
If the LED does not flash faster after at
least 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the step. Several more attempts at
different distances may be necessary. Wait
at least 15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior rearview mirror button 1 Control button
and repeatedly press and release the
2 Mirror display
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐
onds.
Mirror display
Controls The point of the compass is displayed in the
Before operation mirror when driving straight.
Before operating a system using the uni‐

Operating concept
versal garage door opener, ensure that there
are no people, animals, or objects within the Various functions can be called up by pressing
range of movement of the remote-controlled the control button with a pointed object, such
system; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object.
damage. The following setting options are displayed in
succession, depending on how long the con‐
Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-
trol button is pressed:
held transmitter.◀
▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
The system, such as the garage door, can be
▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
operated using the button on the interior rear‐
view mirror while the engine is running or when ▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
the ignition is started. To do this, hold down ▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
the button within receiving range of the system setting.
until the function is activated. The interior rear‐ ▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig‐
nal is being transmitted. Setting the compass zones
Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐
Deleting stored functions
cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐
Press and hold the left and right button on the fer to World map with compass zones.
interior rearview mirror simultaneously
Inf for
ormaap‐
ti
onPr
ovidedby:
145
Online
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ 1. Make sure that there are no large metallic
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the objects or overhead power lines near the
set compass zone appears in the mirror. vehicle and that there is sufficient room to
2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐ drive around in a circle.
trol button quickly and repeatedly until the 2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
number of the compass zone that corre‐ 3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
sponds with your location appears in the prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears
mirror. on the display. Next, drive in a complete
The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐ circle at least once at a speed of no more
pass is ready for use again after approximately than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐
10 seconds. cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of
the compass.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the Left/right-hand steering
event of the following: The digital compass is already set for right or
▷ The wrong compass point is displayed. left-hand steering at the factory.
▷ The point of the compass displayed does

Setting the language
not change despite changing the direction
of travel. Press and hold the control button for approx.
12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control
▷ Not all points of the compass are dis‐
button again to reel between English "E" and
played.
German "O".
Infor
mat
ionPr
ovi dedby:
146
Online
Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐ Replace the cover after use
mately 10 seconds. Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after
use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter
socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀
Sun visor
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐
hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the
mirror lighting switches on.
The cigarette lighter is located in the center

console.
Ashtray/cigarette lighter
Push in the lighter.
Ashtray
The lighter can be removed as
Opening soon as it pops back out.
Connecting electrical
devices
Hints
Do not connect charging devices to the
12 volt socket in the vehicle
Raise cover.
Do not connect battery chargers to the fac‐
tory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as
Emptying this may damage the vehicle battery due to an
Take out the insert. increased power consumption.◀
Lighter Replace the cover after use

Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after
Danger of burns
use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter
Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐ socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀
erwise, there is a danger of getting burned.
Switch off the ignition and take the remote
control with you when leaving the vehicle so
that children cannot use the lighter and burn
themselves.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
147
Online
Sockets In the trunk
General information
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is run‐
ning or when the ignition is switched on.
Note
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable The socket is located on the left side in the
connectors. trunk.
Front center console

USB interface for data
transfer
The concept
Connection for importing and exporting data
on USB devices, e.g.:
▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 35.
▷ Music collection.
Remove the cover or cigarette lighter. ▷ Importing Trips.
Rear center console Hints

Observe the following when connecting:
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or
lights to the USB interface.
▷ Do not connect USB hard drives.
▷ Do not use the USB interface for recharg‐
ing external devices.
Remove the cover.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
148
Online
Without telephone: overview Ensuring the stability of the child seat

When installing child restraint systems,
make sure that the child seat is securely fas‐
tened to the backrest of the seat. Angle and
headrest of the backrest might need to be ad‐
justed or possibly be removed. Make sure that
all backrests are securely locked. Otherwise
the stability of the child seat can be affected,
and there is an increased risk of injury because
of unexpected movement of the seat back‐
rest.◀
The USB interface is located in the glove com‐
partment.
Opening
1. Pull the lever in the cargo area to release
With telephone: overview
the rear seat backrest.
The USB interface is located in the center arm‐

2. The unlocked backrest moves forward
rest.
slightly.
Through-loading system
The concept
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding
down the rear seat backrest.
Hints
Danger of jamming 3. Fold backrest forward.
Before folding down the rear seat back‐
rests, ensure that the area of movement of the Closing
backrests is clear. Ensure that no one is lo‐ Return the rear seat backrest to the upright
cated in or reaches into the area of movement seating position and engage it.
of the rear seat backrests. Otherwise, injury or
damage may result.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
149
Online
Ensure that the lock is securely engaged

Make sure that the lock engages prop‐
erly when folding back, otherwise transported
cargo could enter the car's interior during brak‐
ing or evasive maneuvers and endanger the
vehicle's occupants.◀
To secure cargo, refer to page 160, with nets

or draw straps, the cargo area is fitted with
lashing eyes.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
150
Online
Storage compartments Controls
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options ▷ Storage compartment in the front center
armrest, refer to page 152.
▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats.
series. It also describes features that are not ▷ Storage compartment in the rear center
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to console, refer to page 153.
the selected options or country versions. This ▷ Storage compartment between the rear
also applies to safety-related functions and seats, refer to page 153.
respective features and systems. Glove compartment
Front passenger side
Hints
Note
No loose objects in the car's interior
Do not stow any objects in the car's inte‐ Close the glove compartment again im‐
rior without securing them; otherwise, they mediately
may present a danger to occupants e.g., during Close the glove compartment immediately af‐
braking and evasive maneuvers.◀ ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐
cur during accidents.◀
Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash‐
board
Opening
Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard.
The mat materials could damage the dash‐
board.◀
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 151. Pull the handle.
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side, The light in the glove compartment switches
refer to page 152. on.
▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
page 152. Closing
▷ Without Smoker's package: Front storage Fold cover closed.
compartment, in front of the cupholders,
refer to page 152.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
151
Online
Controls Storage compartments
Locking Front storage compartment

The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key to separately secure the trunk
lid, refer to page 41, e.g.
This prevents access to the glove compart‐
ment and to the trunk.
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over, such as at a
hotel, without the integrated key.
Driver's side A storage compartment is located in the center

armrest in front of the cup holders.
Note
Close the glove compartment again im‐
mediately
Center armrest
Close the glove compartment immediately af‐
ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐ Front
cur during accidents.◀ A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the front seats.
Opening
Opening
Pull the handle.

Fold the center armrest up.
Closing
Fold cover closed. Repositioning
Center armrest can be pushed forwards or
backwards. It engages in the end positions.
Compartments in the doors
Connection for an external audio
Do not stow any breakable objects
device
Do not store any breakable objects, e. g.
An external audio device, e.g.,
glass bottles, in the compartments, or there is
an MP3 player, can be con‐
an increased risk of injury in the event of an ac‐
nected via the AUX-IN port or
cident.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
152
Online
Storage compartments Controls
the USB audio interface in the center armrest. Storage compartments in the
trunk
Storage compartment in the Storage compartment
rear A storage compartment is located on the left
side.
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest. Located on the right side is a storage compart‐
ment for the first aid kit, refer to page 205.
Net for storage compartment

Storage compartment
Smaller objects can be stored in the net of
between the rear seats right storage compartment.
There is a storage compartment between the
rear seats. Multi-function hook
Lightweight objects only
Only hang lightweight objects, e.g. shop‐
Cupholders ping bags, from the multifunction hooks. Oth‐
erwise, there is a danger of objects flying about
Hints
during braking and evasive maneuvers.
Shatter-proof containers and no hot
Only transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it
drinks
has been appropriately secured.◀
Use light and shatter-proof containers and do
not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is
the increased danger of injury in an accident.◀
Unsuitable containers
Do not forcefully push unsuitable con‐
tainers into the cupholders. This may result in
damage.◀
Front
A multi-function hook is located on each side
of the trunk. The multi-function hooks can be
loaded up to a max. of 8.8 lbs/4 kg.
Lashing eyes in the trunk

To secure the cargo, refer to page 160, there
are two or four lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Floor net
The floor net can also be used to secure the
Rear cargo, refer to page 160, and store small
Between the seats. parts.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovidedby:
153
Online
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Online
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating modes.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Online
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
also applies to safety-related functions and Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
systems. The respectively applicable country prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimal per‐
provisions must be observed when using the formance between brake discs and brake
respective features and systems. pads. Drive moderately during this break-in pe‐
riod.
Breaking-in period Clutch

The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
General information level only after a distance driven of approx.
Moving parts need time to adjust to one an‐ 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
other (break-in time). engage the clutch gently.
The following instructions will help accomplish

Following part replacement
a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐ served if any of the components above-men‐
trol, refer to page 78. tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
Engine, transmission, and axle drive
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
General driving notes
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
speed: Closing the trunk lid
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
Drive with the trunk lid closed
100 mph/160 km/h.
Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐
wise, in the event of an accident or braking and
stances.
evasive maneuvers, passengers and other traf‐
fic may be injured, and the vehicle may be
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km damaged. In addition, exhaust fumes may en‐
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be ter the vehicle interior.◀
increased.
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
Tires avoided:
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐ ▷ If the convertible top is closed, close all
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new; windows.
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
156
Online
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
▷ Drive moderately. surface, ultimately undermining your ability to

steer and brake the vehicle.
Hot exhaust system
Hot exhaust system
Driving through water
High temperatures are generated in the Observe water level and speed
exhaust system. Do not exceed the maximum water level
Do not remove the heat shields installed and and maximum speed; otherwise, the vehicle's
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure engine, the electrical systems and the trans‐
that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, mission may be damaged.◀
grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot Drive though calm water only and only if it is
exhaust system while driving, while in idle po‐ not deeper than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this
sition mode, or when parked. Such contact height, no faster than walking speed, up to
could lead to a fire, resulting in an increased 3 mph/5 km/h.
risk of serious personal injury as well as prop‐
erty damage. Braking safely
Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
there is a danger of getting burned.◀ ard feature.
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
Mobile communication devices in the way of braking in situations needed.
vehicle
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
Mobile communication devices in the ve‐ any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐
hicle fort.
It is not recommended to use mobile phones, Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
such as mobile phones, in the vehicle interior the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
without a direct connection to an external aer‐ active mode.
ial. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronics and In certain braking situations, the perforated
mobile communication devices can interfere brake discs can cause functional problems.
with each other. In addition, there is no assur‐ However, this has no effect on the perform‐
ance that the radiation generated during trans‐ ance and operational reliability of the brake.
mission will be conducted away from the vehi‐
cle interior.◀
Objects within the range of movement
of the pedals
Hydroplaning
No objects in the area around the pedals
Hydroplaning Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐ objects out of the pedal area; otherwise, the
duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀ function of the pedals could be impeded while
driving and create the risk of an accident.
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface. Do not place additional floor mats over existing
mats or other objects.
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete Only use floor mats that have been approved
loss of contact between the tires and the road for the vehicle and can be properly attached to
floor.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovidedby:
157
Online
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐ Corrosion will built up when the maximum
tened again after they were removed for clean‐ pressure applied to the brake pads during
ing, e.g.◀ braking is not reached - thus discs don't get
cleaned.
Driving in wet conditions Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
press brake pedal ever so gently every few sponse - generally that cannot be corrected.
miles.
Condensation under the parked
Ensure that this action does not endanger
vehicle
other traffic.
When using the automatic climate control,
The heat generated in this process helps dry
condensation water develops collecting under‐
the brake discs and pads.
neath the vehicle.
In this way braking efficiency will be available
These traces of water under the vehicle are
when you need it.
normal.
Hills
Avoid stressing the brakes
Avoid placing excessive stress on the
brake system. Light but consistent brake pres‐
sure can lead to high temperatures, brakes
wearing out and possibly even brake failure.◀
Do not drive in neutral

Do not drive in neutral or with the engine
stopped, as doing so disables engine braking.
In addition, steering and brake assist are un‐
available with the engine stopped.◀
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the

gear that requires least braking efforts. Other‐
wise the brakes may overheat and reduce
brake efficiency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down, going all the way to first gear,
if needed.
Brake disc corrosion

Brake disc corrosion and contamination of the
brake pads are favored by:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
158
Online
Loading Driving tips
Loading
Vehicle features and options vehicle and unstable driving situations
may result.
2. Determine the combined weight of the

Hints driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
Overloading the vehicle
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
To avoid exceeding the approved ca‐ and passengers from XXX kilograms or
pacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle. YYY pounds.
Overloading can lead to overheating and in‐
creases the rate at which damage develops in‐ 4. The resulting figure equals the available
side the tires. This could result in a sudden amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
loss of tire inflation pressure.◀ pacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
No fluids in the cargo area 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs
Make sure that fluids do not leak into the passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐ available cargo and luggage load capacity
aged.◀ is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =
400 lbs.
Heavy and hard objects
5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
Do not stow any heavy and hard objects gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
in the car's interior without securing them; oth‐ cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
erwise, they may present a danger to occu‐ available cargo and luggage load capacity
pants, e.g., during braking and evasive maneu‐ calculated in Step 4.
vers.◀
Determining the load limit

1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard:
▷ The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage
I
nforto
ma the
t
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
159
Online
Driving tips Loading
Load Securing cargo

Lashing eyes in the trunk
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of

the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the To secure the cargo there are two or four lash‐
less cargo that can be transported. ing eyes in the cargo area.
Floor net
Stowing cargo The floor net can also be used to secure cargo
and store small parts.
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo. Hook the floor net into the fittings in the trunk
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of floor.
the backrests.
Securing cargo
Securing cargo
Stow and secure the cargo as described;
otherwise it may present a danger to the occu‐
pants, e.g., during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers.◀
▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐
taining straps or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with
cargo straps.
Attach the cargo straps, retaining straps or
I
nfor
mat
ionProvi
drawdedby:
straps to the lashing eyes in the trunk.
160
Online
Saving fuel Driving tips
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options Tires
General information
series. It also describes features that are not Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to ways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel con‐
the selected options or country versions. This sumption.
systems. The respectively applicable country Check the tire inflation pressure
provisions must be observed when using the regularly
respective features and systems. Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before
starting on a long trip.
General information Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
tire wear.
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐
sions.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐
ferent factors.
Drive away immediately
Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐ Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
erate driving style and regular maintenance, the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐ right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
ronmental impact. This is the quickest way of warming the cold
engine up to operating temperature.
Remove unnecessary cargo

Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Look well ahead when
driving
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
Remove attached parts By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
following use cle driving ahead of you.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐ Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption. consumption.
Closing the windows Avoid high engine speeds

Open windows increase air resistance and As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
therefore lead to greater fuel consumption. fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Use 1st gear to get the vehicle moving. Start‐
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
oving
i
dedwith
by: the 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When
161
Online
Driving tips Saving fuel
accelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐ Switch off any functions that
gine speeds.
are not currently needed
When you reach the desired speed, shift into
the highest applicable gear and drive with the Functions such as seat heating and the rear
engine speed as low as possible and at a con‐ window defroster require a lot of energy and
stant speed. reduce the range, especially in city and stop-
and-go traffic.
If necessary, observe the gear shift indicator of
the vehicle, refer to page 87. Reel off these functions if they are not needed.
The ECO PRO driving program supports the
energy conserving use of comfort features.
Use coasting These functions are automatically deactivated
partially or completely.
When approaching a red light, take your foot
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to
a halt.
Have maintenance carried
For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐
erator and let the vehicle roll.
out
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting. Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
optimal vehicle efficiency and operating life.
The maintenance should be carried out by
Switch off the engine during
Also note the BMW Maintenance System, refer
longer stops to page 193.
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic
congestion. ECO PRO
Auto Start/Stop function The concept
The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves
automatically switches off the engine during a on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐
stop. gine control and comfort features, e. g. the cli‐
If the engine is switched off and then restarted mate control output, are adjusted.
rather than leaving the engine running con‐ Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are matically decoupled from the transmission in
reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐ the D selector lever position. The vehicle con‐
onds of switching off the engine. tinues traveling with the engine idling to re‐
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐ duce fuel consumption. Selector lever position
mined by other factors, such as driving style, D remains engaged.
road conditions, maintenance or environmental In addition, context-sensitive instructions are
factors. displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐
sumption driving style.
The achieved extended range is displayed in
the instrument cluster as bonus range.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
162
Online
Overview Coasting
The system includes the following Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐
EfficientDynamics functions and displays: ing the engine and Coasting, refer to
▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 163. page 165, with the engine idling.
▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to This function is only available in ECO PRO
page 164 mode.
▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to

ECO PRO climate control
page 163.
"ECO PRO climate control"
▷ ECO PRO coasting driving status, refer to
page 165. Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.
▷ ECO PRO driving style analysis, refer to By making a slight change to the set tempera‐
page 166. ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or
cooling of the car's interior, fuel consumption
Activate ECO PRO can be economized.
The mirror heating is made available when out‐
Press button repeatedly until ECO
side temperatures are very cold.
PRO is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
ECO PRO potential
Shows potential savings with the current set‐
Configuring ECO PRO tings in percentages.
Via the Driving Dynamics Control Display in the instrument cluster

1. Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO" ECO PRO bonus range
3. Configure the program. An adjusted driving style helps
you extend your driving range.
Via the iDrive This may be displayed as the
1. "Settings" bonus range in the instrument
2. "ECO PRO mode" cluster.
Or The bonus range is shown in the range display.
The bonus range is automatically reset every
1. "Settings"
time the vehicle is refueled.
2. "Driving mode"
3. "Configure ECO PRO"
Configure the program.
ECO PRO Tip

▷ "Tip at:":
Adjust the ECO PRO speed.
▷ "ECO PRO speed warning":
The output is reduced once the set ECO
PRO speed is reached. I
nfor mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
163
Online
Efficiency display ECO PRO tip, driving tip
Display in the instrument cluster The arrow indicates that the driving
style can be adjusted to be more fuel
efficient by backing off the accelerator
for instance.
Note
The efficiency display and ECO PRO tips in the
instrument cluster appear when the ECO PRO
display is activated.
Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips:
Display in the instrument cluster with extended 1. "Settings"

range 2. "Instrument cluster"
3. "ECO PRO Info"
ECO PRO tip, symbols

An additional symbol and text instructions are
displayed.
Symbol Measure
For efficient driving back off the ac‐

celerator or delay accelerating to al‐
low time to assess road conditions.
A mark in the efficiency display informs about
the current driving style. Reduce speed to the selected ECO
PRO speed.
Mark in the area of arrow 1: display of the en‐
ergy recovered by coasting or when braking.
Steptronic transmission: shift from
Mark in the area of arrow 2: display when ac‐ M/S to D.
celerating.
Your driving style's efficiency is shown by the Steptronic transmission/manual
bar's color: transmission: follow shifting instruc‐
▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long tions.
as the mark moves within the blue range. Manual transmission: engage neu‐
▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by tral for engine stop.
backing off the accelerator pedal.
The display switches to blue as soon as all
conditions for fuel-efficiency-optimized driving
are met.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
164
Online
Indications on the Control Display Coasting
EfficientDynamics The concept

Information on fuel consumption and technol‐ The system helps to conserve fuel.
ogy can be displayed while driving. To do this, under certain conditions the engine
1. "Vehicle info" is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐
sion when selector lever position D is set. The
2. "EfficientDynamics"
vehicle continues traveling with the engine
idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector
Displaying fuel consumption history lever position D remains engaged.
The average fuel consumption can be dis‐
This driving condition is referred to as coast‐
played within an adjustable time frame.
ing.
Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐
As soon as you step on the brake or accelera‐
lected time frame.
tor pedal, the engine is automatically coupled
Trip interruptions are represented below the again.
bar on the time axis.
"Consumption history" Hints
Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO, re‐
Adjusting fuel consumption history fer to page 162, driving mode.
time frame Coasting is automatically activated when ECO
Select the symbol. PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics
Control.
Resetting fuel consumption history The function is available in a certain speed
1. Open "Options". range.
2. "Reset consumption history" A proactively driving style helps the driver to
use the function as often as possible and sup‐
Displaying EfficientDynamics info ports the fuel-conserving effect of coasting.
The current efficiency can be displayed.
"EfficientDynamics info" Safety mode
The following systems are displayed: The function is not available under one of the
following conditions.
▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
▷ Energy recovery.
▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on
▷ Climate control output. steep uphill or downhill grades.
▷ Coasting. ▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low
or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐
Display ECO PRO tips sive current.
"ECO PRO Tips" ▷ Cruise control activated.
use. Functional requirements
In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in
a speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap‐
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovidedby:
165
Online
prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if Indications on the Control Display
the following conditions are met: The Coasting driving condition is displayed in
▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode
operated. is active.
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐ The distance traveled in the Coasting driving
tion D. condition is indicated by a counter.
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
The driving status Coast can be influenced
with the shift paddles.
Display
Display in the instrument cluster
Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2:

driving condition Coasting.
Displaying EfficientDynamics info

1. "Vehicle info"
3. "EfficientDynamics info"
The mark in the efficiency display is backlit in
blue and is located at the zero point. The tach‐ Deactivating the system manually
ometer approximately indicates idle speed. The function can be deactivated in the Config‐
The coasting point indicator is illuminated at ure ECO PRO, refer to page 163, menu, e.g., to
the zero point during coasting. use the braking effect of the engine when trav‐
eling downhill.
Display in the instrument cluster with Settings are stored for the profile currently in
extended range use.
The mark in the efficiency dis‐
play below the tachometer is ECO PRO driving style analysis
backlit in blue and is located at
the zero point. The tachometer The concept
approximately indicates idle In this situation the system helps develop an
speed. especially efficient driving style and to con‐
The coasting point indicator is illuminated at serve fuel.
the zero point during coasting. For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the Control Display.
Using this indication, the individual driving
style can be oriented toward conserving fuel.
I
nfor
mat
ionProvidedby:
166
Online
The last fifteen minutes of a trip are evaluated. Tips about the energy saving driving style,
The range of the vehicle can be extended by Conserving fuel, refer to page 161.
an efficient driving style.
This gain in range is displayed as a bonus
range in the instrument cluster and on the
Control Display.
The function is only available in ECO PRO
mode.
Calling up ECO PRO driving style

analysis
1. Activate ECO PRO.
3. Select the symbol.
Display on the Control Display
The display of the ECO PRO driving style anal‐

ysis consists of a symbolized route and a
lookup table.
The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv‐
ing style. The more efficient the driving style,
the smoother the depicted route becomes, ar‐
row 1.
The table of values contains stars. The more
efficient the driving style, the more stars are in‐
cluded in the table and the faster the bonus
range increases, arrow 2.
If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐
cient, a wavy road and a reduced number of
stars is displayed.
To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
PRO tips are displayed during driving.
Infor mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
167
Online
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Online
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Online
Mobility Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle features and options 2. Turn the tank lid counterclockwise.

3. Place the tank lid in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Hints
Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 172, prior to refueling.
Refuel promptly
Refuel no later than at a range of
30 miles/50 km or engine operation might fail
and damage might occur.◀
Fuel lid Closing

1. Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you
Opening clearly hear a click.
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler 2. Close the fuel filler flap.
flap.
Do not pinch the retaining strap
Do not pinch the retaining strap attached
to the lid; otherwise, the lid cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapors can escape.◀
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap

In the event of an electrical malfunction, e.g.
The release is located in the trunk.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
170
Online
Refueling Mobility
Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol.

This releases the fuel filler flap.
Observe the following when

refueling
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Do not overfill the fuel tank
Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise
fuel may eslide, causing harm to the environ‐
ment and damaging the vehicle.◀
Handling fuels
Observe safety regulations posted at the
gas station.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
171
Online
Mobility Fuel
Fuel
Vehicle features and options Ethanol should satisfy the following quality
standards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
series. It also describes features that are not CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to xx: comply with the current standard in each
the selected options or country versions. This case.
Do not use a fuel with a higher percent‐
age of ethanol
respective features and systems. Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol per‐
centage than recommended or one with other
types of alcohol, e.g. M5 to M100; otherwise
this could damage the engine and fuel supply
Fuel recommendation
system.◀
Note
Recommended fuel grade
General fuel quality
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Even fuels that conform to the specifica‐
tions can be of low quality. This may cause en‐
Minimum fuel grade
gine problems, for instance poor engine start-
up behavior, poor handling and/or poor BMW recommends AKI 89.
performance. Switch gas stations or use a Minimum fuel grade
brand name fuel with a higher octane rating.◀
Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐
mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per‐
Gasoline formance.◀
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
tent.
when starting at high outside temperatures.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ This has no effect on the engine life.
taining metal must not be used.
Fuel quality
Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with‐
The use of poor-quality fuels may result
out metallic additives.
in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso‐ tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
iron, as this can cause permanent damage to ronmental conditions such as high ambient
the catalytic converter and other compo‐ temperature and high altitude, may occur.
nents.◀
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling. brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
Informat
ionPr ovidedby:
172
Online
Fuel Mobility
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to

purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
173
Online
Mobility Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
This chapter describes all standard, country- than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
specific and optional features offered with the been parked for at least 2 hours.
The displays of inflation devices may under-
read by up to 1.45 psi/0.1 bar.
also applies to safety-related functions and For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire
systems. The respectively applicable country inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire
provisions must be observed when using the Monitor.
respective features and systems. For Tire Pressure Monitor: after correcting the
tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure
Monitor.
Tire inflation pressure
Tire inflation pressure specifications
Safety information The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐ page 175, contains all tire inflation pressure
sure influence the following: specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
▷ The service life of the tires. ambient temperature. Tire inflation pressure
specifications apply to approved tire sizes and
▷ Road safety. recommended tire brands. This information
▷ Driving comfort. can be obtained from your service center.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
Checking the tire inflation pressure please note the following:
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐ ▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
sure, and correct it as needed: at least twice a
month and before a long trip. If you fail to ob‐ Tire inflation pressures up to
serve this precaution, you may be driving on 100 mph/160 km/h
tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
that may not only compromise your vehicle's
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
driving stability, but also lead to tire damage
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
and the risk of an accident.◀
to page 175, and adjust as necessary.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐
flation pressure.
Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐
tion pressure increases along with the tire's
temperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐
fications relate to cold tires or tires with the
ambient temperature.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
174
Online
Wheels and tires Mobility
Tire size Pressure specifications in

bar/PSI
Front: 225/45 2.2 / 32 -

R 17 91 W RSC - 2.5 / 36
Rear: 245/40
R 17 91 W RSC
Front: 225/40 R 2.3 / 33 -

18 92 Y XL RSC - 2.8 / 41
These pressure values can also be found on
the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's Rear: 245/35 R
door pillar. 18 92 Y XL RSC
Front: 225/40 R 2.3 / 33 -

Maximum permissible speed
18 88 Y Std - 2.8 / 41
Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐
Rear: 245/35 R
wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀
18 92 Y XL Std
Tire inflation pressure values up to Front: 225/35 2.6 / 38 -

100 mph/160 km/h R 19 88 Y XL - 3.1 / 45
RSC
228i, 228i xDrive Rear: 245/30
R 19 89 Y XL
Tire size Pressure specifications in RSC
bar/PSI
Emergency Speed up to a max. of
Specifications in wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h
bar/PSI with cold T 125/80 R 17 99 4.2 / 60
tires M
225/45 R 17 91 H 2.2 / 32 2.5 / 36

M+S RSC
205/50 R 17 89 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38

V M+S A/S RSC
205/50 R 17 89 H
M+S RSC
225/40 R 18 92 V 2.4 / 35 2.8 / 41

M+S XL A/S RSC
225/40 R 18 92 V
M+S XL RSC
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
175
Online
M235i relevant table on the following pages. Other‐

wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI Tire inflation pressure values over
Specifications in 100 mph/160 km/h
bar/PSI with cold
tires 228i, 228i xDrive
Without high-speed tuning feature
205/50 R 17 89 H 2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41 Tire size Pressure specifications in

M+S RSC bar/PSI
225/45 R 17 91 H Specifications in
M+S RSC bar/PSI with cold
225/40 R 18 92 V tires
M+S XL RSC
225/40 R 18 92 V 225/45 R 17 91 H 2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41
M+S XL A/S RSC M+S RSC
Front: 225/40 R 2.3 / 33 - 205/50 R 17 89 2.4 / 35 2.9 /42
18 88 Y Std - 2.8 / 41 V M+S A/S RSC
Rear: 245/35 R 18 205/50 R 17 89 H
92 Y XL Std M+S RSC
Front: 225/40 R 2.3 / 33 - 225/40 R 18 92 V 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45
18 92 Y XL RSC - 2.8 / 41 M+S XL A/S RSC
Rear: 245/35 R 18 225/40 R 18 92 V
92 Y XL RSC M+S XL RSC
Front: 225/35 2.6 / 38 - Front: 225/45 2.2 / 32 -
R 19 88 Y XL RSC - 3.1 / 45 R 17 91 W RSC - 2.7 / 39
Rear: 245/30 R 19 Rear: 245/40
89 Y XL RSC R 17 91 W RSC
Emergency Speed up to a max. of Front: 225/40 R 2.3 / 33 -
wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h 18 92 Y XL RSC - 2.8 / 41
T 125/80 R 17 99 4.2 / 60 Rear: 245/35 R
M 18 92 Y XL RSC
Front: 225/40 R 2.3 / 33 -

Tire inflation pressures at max. 18 88 Y Std
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h - 2.8 / 41
Rear: 245/35 R
Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h 18 92 Y XL Std
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from Informa
thet
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
176
Online
Tire size Pressure specifications in Tire size Pressure specifications in

bar/PSI bar/PSI
Front: 225/35 2.6 / 38 - Front: 225/35 2.9 /42 -

R 19 88 Y XL - 3.1 / 45 R 19 88 Y XL - 3.4 / 49
RSC RSC
Rear: 245/30 Rear: 245/30
R 19 89 Y XL R 19 89 Y XL
RSC RSC
Emergency Speed up to a max. of Emergency Speed up to a max. of

wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h
T 125/80 R 17 99 4.2 / 60 T 125/80 R 17 99 4.2 / 60
M M
With high-speed tuning feature M235i

Tire size Pressure specifications in Without high-speed tuning feature
bar/PSI Tire size Pressure specifications
Specifications in in bar/PSI
bar/PSI with cold Specifications in
tires bar/PSI with cold
tires
225/45 R 17 91 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46
H M+S RSC 205/50 R 17 89 H 2.6 / 38 3.0 / 44
205/50 R 17 89 2.9 /42 3.4 / 49 M+S RSC
H M+S RSC 225/45 R 17 91 H
225/40 R 18 92 V M+S RSC
M+S XL RSC 225/40 R 18 92 V
M+S XL RSC
Front: 225/45 2.7 / 39 -
R 17 91 W RSC 225/40 R 18 92 V
- 3.2 / 46
M+S XL A/S RSC
Rear: 245/40
R 17 91 W RSC Front: 225/40 R 2.3 / 33 -
18 88 Y Std - 2.8 / 41
Front: 225/40 R 2.6 / 38 -
18 92 Y XL RSC Rear: 245/35 R 18
- 3.1 / 45
92 Y XL Std
Rear: 245/35 R
18 92 Y XL RSC Front: 225/40 R 2.3 / 33 -
18 92 Y XL RSC - 2.8 / 41
Front: 225/40 R 2.6 / 38 -
18 88 Y Std Rear: 245/35 R 18
- 3.1 / 45
92 Y XL RSC
Rear: 245/35 R
18 92 Y XL Std
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
177
Online
Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications in

in bar/PSI bar/PSI
Front: 225/35 2.6 / 38 - Front: 225/35 2.9 /42 -

R 19 88 Y XL RSC - 3.1 / 45 R 19 88 Y XL - 3.4 / 49
Rear: 245/30 R 19 RSC
89 Y XL RSC Rear: 245/30
R 19 89 Y XL
Emergency Speed up to a max. of
RSC
wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h
T 125/80 R 17 99 4.2 / 60 Emergency Speed up to a max. of
M wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h
T 125/80 R 17 99 4.2 / 60
With high-speed tuning feature M
Tire size Pressure specifications in

bar/PSI
Tire identification marks
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold Tire size
tires 245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
205/50 R 17 89 H 2.9 /42 3.4 / 49 45: aspect ratio in %
M+S RSC R: radial tire code
225/45 R 17 91 H 18: rim diameter in inches
M+S RSC
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
225/40 R 18 92 V
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
M+S XL RSC
Front: 225/40 R 2.7 / 39 - Speed letter

18 88 Y Std - 3.2 / 46 Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h
Rear: 245/35 R R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h
18 92 Y XL Std
S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h
Front: 225/40 R 2.7 / 39 - T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
18 92 Y XL RSC - 3.2 / 46 H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
Rear: 245/35 R
V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
18 92 Y XL RSC
W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number

DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0115
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
I
nfor
mat
i xxx:
onProvitire
ded size
by: and tire design
178
Online
0115: tire age Traction

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
the U.S. Department of Transportation. are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
Tire age stop on wet pavement as measured under
DOT … 0115: the tire was manufactured in the controlled conditions on specified government
1st week of 2015. test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
Recommendation The traction grade assigned to this tire is
Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
least every 6 years. and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable Temperature
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and maximum section width. and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
Temperature A heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
DOT Quality Grades Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
Treadwear
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
Traction AA A B C sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
Temperature A B C to a level of performance which all passenger
All passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐ car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
eral Safety Requirements in addition to these Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band
grades. A represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐
quired by law.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating Temperature grade for this tire
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
ernment test course. For example, a tire not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
times as well on the government course as a in combination, can cause heat buildup and
tire graded 100. The relative performance of possible tire failure.
tires depends upon the actual conditions of If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀
their use, however, and may depart signifi‐
cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐
ing habits, service practices and differences in RSC – Run-flat tires
road characteristics and climate. Run-flat tires, refer to page 182, are labeled
with a circular symbol containing the letters
RSC marked on the sidewall.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
179
Online
M+S Hints
Winter and all-season tires with better cold Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
weather performance than summer tires. as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur
Tire tread with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be
Summer tires careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
with low-profile tires.
0.12 in/3 mm.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
fects:
the tire tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
▷ Unusual vibrations while driving.
Winter tires ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than dency to pull to the left or right.
0.16 in/4 mm. Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over
Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are curbs, road damage, or similar things.
less suitable for winter operation. In case of tire damage
If there are indications of tire damage, re‐
Minimum tread depth
duce your speed immediately and have the
rims and tires checked right away; otherwise,
there is the increased risk of an accident.
Drive carefully to the nearest service center. If
necessary, have the vehicle towed or trans‐
ported there. Otherwise, tire damage can be‐
come life threatening for vehicle occupants
and also other traffic.◀
Repair of tire damage

Wear indicators are distributed around the For safety reasons, the manufacturer of
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐ your vehicle recommends that you do not have
quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐
placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐
They are marked on the side of the tire with sult.◀
TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.
Tire damage Changing wheels and tires
General information Mounting

Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign Information on mounting tires
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. Have mounting and balancing performed
only by a service center.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
180
Online
If work is not carried out properly, there is a With proper use, these tires meet the highest
danger of subsequent damage and related standards for safety and handling.
safety hazards.◀
New tires
Wheel and tire combination Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
You can ask the service center about the right ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
wheel/tire combination and wheel rim versions they achieve their full traction potential after a
for the vehicle. break-in time.
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair Drive conservatively for the first
the function of a variety of systems such as 200 miles/300 km.
ABS or DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐ Retreaded tires
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐ The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
figuration from a single manufacturer. ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel Retreaded tires
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
as soon as possible. Possibly substantial variations in the de‐
sign and age of the tire casing structures can
Approved wheels and tires limit service life and have a negative impact on
You should only use wheels and tires road safety.◀
that have been approved by the vehicle manu‐
facturer for your vehicle type; otherwise, e.g., Winter tires
despite having the same official size ratings,
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
variations can lead to chassis contact and with
winter roads.
it, the risk of severe accidents
Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐
The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐
they do not provide the same level of perform‐
mine if they are suited for use, and therefore
ance as winter tires.
cannot guarantee the operating safety of the
vehicle.◀
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
Recommended tire brands than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then a respective symbol is displayed in your
field of vision. You can obtain this sign from the
tire specialist or from your service center.
Maximum speed for winter tires
Do not exceed the maximum speed for
the respective winter tires; otherwise, tire dam‐
age and accidents can occur.◀
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐ Run-flat tires
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. own safety you should replace them only with
I
nf ormat
ionProvi dedby:
181
Online
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the Follow the instructions for continued driving
case of a flat tire. Your service center will be with a flat tire.
glad to advise you.
Changing run-flat tires
Rotating wheels between axles For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
Different wear patterns can occur on the front spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire.
and rear axles depending on individual driving Your service center will be glad to advise you.
conditions. The tires can be rotated between
the axles to achieve even wear. Your service
center will be glad to advise you. After rotating, Mobility System
check the tire pressure and correct if needed.
Rotating the tires is not permissible on vehi‐ The concept
cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
front and rear axles. can be sealed quickly to enable continued
travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
Storage into the tires, which seals the damage from the
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with inside.
as little exposure to light as possible. The compressor can be used to check the tire
Always protect tires against all contact with oil, inflation pressure.
grease and fuels.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐ Hints
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire. ▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
lity System found on the compressor and
sealant container.
Run-flat tires ▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
Label 1/8 in/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact the nearest service center if the
tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
that have penetrated the tire.
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering
wheel.
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
wheel electronics. In this case, have the
RSC label on the tire sidewall. electronics checked at the next opportu‐
The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup‐ nity and have them replaced if needed.
porting, to a limited degree, and possibly spe‐
Enclosed areas
cial rims.
Do not let the engine run in enclosed
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to
areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may
remain drivable to a restricted degree in the
lead to loss of consciousness and death. The
event of a tire inflation pressure loss.
I
nformat
ionProvidedby:
182
Online
exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an Filling the tire with sealant
odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀ 1. Shake the sealing container.
Storage
The Mobility System is located under the
cargo floor panel.
Sealing container
2. Take the connection hose completely out

of the compressor housing. Do not kink the
hose.
▷ Sealing container, arrow 1.

▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
Compressor
3. Attach the connection hose to the connec‐

tor of the sealing container, ensuring that it
engages audibly.
1 On/off reel
2 Holder for bottle
3 Reduce inflation pressure
4 Inflation pressure dial
5 Compressor
6 Connector/cable for socket
7 Connection hose — stowed in the bottom
of the compressor
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
183
Online
4. Slide the sealing container upright into the 7. With the ignition turned on or the engine
holder on the compressor housing, ensur‐ running, reel on the compressor.
ing that it engages audibly.
Switch off the compressor after 10 mi‐

5. Screw the connection hose onto the tire nutes
valve of the defective wheel. Do not allow the compressor to run longer than
10 minutes; otherwise, the device will overheat
and may be damaged.◀
Let the compressor run for approx. 3 to 8 mi‐

nutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a
tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant, the
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach
approx. 5 bar. Do not reel off the compressor at
this point.
6. With the compressor switched off, insert If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not
the plug into a power socket inside the ve‐ reached:
hicle.
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel.
3. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐
tribute the sealant in the tire.
4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be
reached, contact your service center.
Stowing the Mobility System

1. Remove the connection hose of the seal‐
ant container from the wheel.
2. Remove the connection hose from the
sealant container.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
184
Online
3. Wrap the empty sealant container and con‐ 4. Insert the connector into a power socket
nection hose in suitable material to avoid inside the vehicle.
dirtying the cargo area.
4. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐
cle.
Distributing the sealant

Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐
sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the
tire.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 5. Correct the tire inflation pressure to
12 mph/20 km/h. 2.5 bar.
▷ Increase pressure: with the ignition
To correct the tire inflation pressure turned on or the engine running, reel
1. Stop at a suitable location. on the compressor.
2. Screw the connection hose onto the tire ▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐
valve stem. ton on the compressor.
Continuing the trip

Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Replace the defective tire and the sealant con‐
tainer of the Mobility System as soon as possi‐
ble.
3. Attach the connection hose directly to the
compressor.
Snow chains
Fine-link snow chains
Only certain types of fine-link snow chains
have been tested by the manufacturer of the
vehicle, classified as road-safe and approved.
Information about the approved snow chains
are available from the service center.
Use
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size:
▷ 205/55 R 16.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovidedby:
185
Online
▷ 205/50 R 17.
▷ 225/45 R 17.
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
tions.
Make sure that the snow chains are always
sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord‐
ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control if needed.
Maximum speed with snow chains

Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using snow chains.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
186
Online
Engine compartment Mobility
Engine compartment
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal 6 Oil filler neck

2 Vehicle identification number 7 Coolant reservoir
3 Washer fluid reservoir The coolant reservoir for 6-cylinder and
4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal diesel engines is located on the opposite
side of the engine compartment.
5 Engine compartment fuse box
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
187
Online
Mobility Engine compartment
Hood Indicator/warning lights

When the hood is unlocked, a Check Control
Hints message is displayed.
Working in the engine compartment
Closing the hood
Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without the Hood open when driving
necessary professional technical training. If you see any signs that the hood is not
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐ completely closed while driving, pull over im‐
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed mediately and close it securely.◀
only by a service center.
Danger of jamming
If work is not carried out properly, there is a
Make sure that the closing path of the
danger of subsequent damage and related
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀
safety hazards.◀
Never reach into the engine compart‐

ment
Never reach into spaces or gaps in the engine
compartment; otherwise, there is a risk of in‐
jury, e.g., from rotating or hot parts.◀
Fold down wiper arm

Before opening the hood, ensure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield, or this
Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16
may result in damage.◀
in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.
The hood must audibly engage on both sides.
Opening the hood
1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
Hood is unlocked
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever

again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
188
Online
Engine oil Mobility
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
level, a check control message is displayed.
specific and optional features offered with the Requirements
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter
trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip
is displayed.
provisions must be observed when using the With frequent short-distance trips, regularly
respective features and systems. perform a detailed measurement.
Displaying the engine oil level

General information 1. "Vehicle info"
The engine oil consumption is dependent on 2. "Vehicle status"

the driving style and driving conditions. 3. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil consumption can increase in
case of, for example: Engine oil level display messages
▷ Sporty driving. Different messages appear on the display de‐
pending on the engine oil level. Pay attention
▷ Break-in the engine. to these messages.
▷ Idling of the engine. If the engine oil level is too low, within the next
▷ Usage of non-approved engine oil grades. 125 miles/200 km Add engine oil, refer to
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level page 190.
after refueling. Engine oil level too low
The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil Add engine oil immediately; otherwise,
measurement. an insufficient amount of engine oil could re‐
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐ sult in engine damage.◀
uring principles:
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
▷ Status display
Too much engine oil
▷ Detailed measurement
Have the vehicle checked immediately;
otherwise, surplus engine oil can lead to en‐
gine damage.◀
Electronic oil measurement
Status display Detailed measurement

The engine oil level is monitored electronically In the detailed measurement the engine oil
while driving and shown on the Control Dis‐ level is checked and displayed via a scale.
play. Inf
or mati
onPr ovidedby:
189
Online
Mobility Engine oil
Gasoline engine: Oil filler neck

If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
level, a check control message is displayed.
Diesel engine:
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
creased somewhat.
General information
A detailed measurement is only possible with
certain engines.
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
Requirements played in the instrument cluster. The quantity
to be added is indicated in the message dis‐
▷ Vehicle is on level road.
▷ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral
position, clutch and accelerator pedals not Adding engine oil
depressed. Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km;
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in otherwise, this may cause engine damage.◀
selector lever position N or P and accelera‐
tor pedal not depressed. Do not add too much engine oil
▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐ When too much engine oil is added, im‐
perature. mediately have the vehicle checked, otherwise,
this may cause engine damage.◀
Performing a detailed measurement
Protect children
In order to perform a detailed measurement of
Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐
the engine oil level:
dren and observe the warnings on the contain‐
1. "Vehicle info" ers to prevent health risks.◀
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Measure engine oil level"
4. "Start measurement" Engine oil types to add
The engine oil level is checked and displayed Hints
via a scale.
No oil additives
Time: approx. 1 minute.
Oil additives may lead to engine dam‐
age.◀
Adding engine oil Viscosity grades for engine oils
When selecting an engine oil, ensure that
General information
the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity
Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐ grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40,
cle before engine oil is added. and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine
damage may occur.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
190
Online
Engine oil Mobility
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of

the engine.
Suitable engine oil types

You can add engine oils that meet the follow‐
ing oil rating standards:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01.
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
Further information regarding the oil specifica‐

tions and viscosities of engine oils can be in‐
quired with the service center.
Alternative engine oil types

If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is
not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
gine oil with the following oil rating can be
added:
Gasoline engine
API SM or superior oil rating.
Engine oil change:

The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you let the service center change the motor oil.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
191
Online
Mobility Coolant
Coolant
Vehicle features and options The marks are on the side of the coolant
reservoir.
specific and optional features offered with the Symbol Meaning
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to Maximum
Minimum
provisions must be observed when using the Adding
respective features and systems. 1. Let the engine cool.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
Hints pressure to dissipate, then open it.
Danger of burns from hot engine
Do not open the cooling system while
the engine is hot; otherwise, esliding coolant
may cause burns.◀
Suitable additives
Only use suitable additives; otherwise,
engine damage may occur. The additives are
harmful to your health.◀
Coolant consists of water and additives. 3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
to the specified level; do not overfill.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information about the 4. Turn the lid until there is an audible click.
suitable additives are available from the service The arrows on the coolant reservoir and
center. the lid must point towards one another.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.
Coolant level
General information Disposal
Depending on the engine installation, the cool‐ Comply with the relevant environmen‐
ant reservoir is located on the right side or the tal protection regulations when dispos‐
left side of the engine compartment. ing of coolant and coolant additives.
Checking
1. Let the engine cool.
2. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
tween the minimum and maximum I marks.
nformati
onPr
ovi
dedby:
192
Online
Maintenance Mobility
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
continuously stored in the remote control.
Your service center will read out this data and
suggest the right array of service procedures
for your vehicle.
also applies to safety-related functions and Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐
systems. The respectively applicable country mote control with which the vehicle was driven
provisions must be observed when using the most recently.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
BMW maintenance system tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
count.
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides If this occurs, have a service center update the
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐ time-dependent maintenance procedures,
erational reliability of the vehicle. such as checking brake fluid and, if needed,
changing the engine oil and the microfilter/
In some cases scopes and intervals may vary activated-charcoal filter.
according to the country-specific version. Re‐
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐
cants and wear materials are calculated sepa‐
rately. Additional information is available from
Service and Warranty
the service center. Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Condition Based Service Canadian models
CBS Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
count the driving conditions of your vehicle. and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
Based on this, Condition Based Service recog‐ els for additional information on service re‐
nizes the maintenance requirements. quirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the Maintenance and repair should be performed
amount of maintenance corresponding to your by your service center. Make sure to have reg‐
user profile. ular maintenance procedures recorded in the
Detailed information on service requirements, vehicle's Service and Warranty Information
refer to page 86, can be displayed on the Con‐ Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty
trol Display. and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
els. These entries are proof of regular mainte‐
nance.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
193
Online
Mobility Maintenance
Socket for OBD Onboard

Diagnosis
Note
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis
The socket for onboard diagnostics may
only be used by the service center or a work‐
shop that operates in accordance with the
specifications of the vehicle manufacturer with
correspondingly trained personnel and other
authorized persons. Otherwise, use may result
in operating problems for the vehicle.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for

checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
trol components, in particular the catalytic
converter.
Informat i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
194
Online
Replacing components Mobility
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options Replacing the wiper blades
1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
specific and optional features offered with the 2. Squeeze the retainer spring, arrow 1, and
series. It also describes features that are not fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2.
Onboard vehicle tool kit

3. Remove the wiper blade forward from the
catch.
4. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order
of removal until it locks in place.
5. Fold down the wipers.
Folding down wipers before opening the
hood
Before opening the hood, ensure that the
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located under wiper arms with the wiper blades are against
the cargo floor panel. the windshield to prevent damage.◀
Wiper blade replacement Lamp and bulb replacement

Note Hints
Do not fold down the wipers without Lights and bulbs
wiper blades
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades tion to vehicle safety.
have not been installed; this may damage the
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
windshield.◀
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
the service center if you are unfamiliar those or
if they have not been described here.
You can obtain a selection of replacement
bulbs at the service center.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
195
Online
Mobility Replacing components
Danger of burns Headlight glass

Only change bulbs when they are cool; Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
otherwise, there is a danger of getting ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When
burned.◀ driving with the light switched on, the conden‐
sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐
Working on the lighting system light glass does not need to be changed.
When working on the lighting system, If the headlights do not dim despite driving
you should always reel off the lights affected to with the light switched on, increasing humidity
prevent short circuits. forms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have the
To avoid possible injury or equipment damage service center check this.
when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions
provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀ Headlight setting
The headlight adjustments can be affected by
Do not perform work/bulb replacement
changing lights and bulbs. Have the head‐
on xenon headlights
lights' settings checked and corrected by serv‐
Have any work on the xenon lighting system, ice after a replacement.
including bulb replacement, performed only by
a service center. Due to the high voltage Front lights, bulb replacement
present in the system, there is a danger of fatal
injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀ Halogen headlights
Do not touch the bulbs
Overview
Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare hands, as even minute amounts of
contamination will burn into the bulb's surface
and reduce its service life.
Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar,
or hold the bulb by its base.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Some items of equipment use light-emitting
diodes installed behind a cover as a light 1 Daytime running lights/high beams/head‐
source. light flasher
These light-emitting diodes, which are related 2 Parking lights
to conventional lasers, are officially designated
3 Low beams
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
4 Turn signal
Do not remove the covers
Do not remove the covers, and never
stare into the unfiltered light for several hours;
otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
196
Online
Accessing the turn signals and low beams Low beams

Follow general instructions, refer to page 195. 55-watt bulb, H7.
1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack‐ 1. Turn the cover counterclockwise and re‐
ets and remove the cover. move.
2. Tilt the bulb down and then up to loosen it

Turn signal from the holder and remove.
21-watt bulb, PY21W
1. If necessary, pull the inside trim of the
wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb
socket counterclockwise and remove.
3. Pull the connector off the bulb.

4. Attach the connector to the new bulb.
5. First insert the bulb at the top with the
strap, arrow 1, and then press down firmly,
2. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn arrow 2. The bulb must audibly latch in
counterclockwise and remove. place.
3. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐
verse order of removal.
4. Attach the cover to the wheel house.
6. Close the headlight housing with the lid.

Make sure that the lid engages.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovidedby:
197
Online
Accessing the daytime running lights, high Parking lights

beams/headlight flasher and parking lights 6-watt bulb, H6W.
Follow general instructions, refer to page 195.
1. Tilt the bulb holder down and then up to
1. Open the hood, refer to page 188. loosen it from the holder and remove it.
2. Turn the cover counterclockwise and re‐
move.
2. Carefully remove the bulb from the bulb

holder.
3. To insert the new bulb, proceed in reverse
Daytime running lights and high beams/ order of removal. Make sure you hear the
headlight flasher bulb holder engage.
55-watt bulb, H15. 4. Close the headlight housing with the lid.
1. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and re‐
move. Xenon headlights
Hints
Because of the long life of these bulbs, the
likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the
lights on and off frequently shortens their life.
If a bulb fails, reel on the front fog lights and
continue the trip with great care. Comply with
local regulations.
Do not perform work/bulb replacement
2. Install the new bulb in reverse order of re‐ on xenon headlights
moval. Turn the clockwise bulb here until it Have any work on the xenon lighting system,
hits the stop. including bulb replacement, performed only by
3. Close the headlight housing with the lid. a service center. Due to the high voltage
Make sure that the lid engages. present in the system, there is a danger of fatal
injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀
For checking and adjusting headlamp aim,
please contact your BMW center.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
198
Online
At a glance 21-watt bulb, PY21W
1. In the wheel house, loosen the two brack‐

ets and remove the cover.
1 Parking lights / daytime running lights

2 Low beams/high beams/headlight flasher
3 Turn signal 2. If necessary, pull the inside trim of the
wheel house slightly inward. Turn the bulb
socket counterclockwise and remove.
Xenon headlights
Low beams and high beams are designed with
xenon technology.
The parking lights and daylight running lights
are made using LED technology.
Contact your service center in the event of a
malfunction.
Turn signal
Follow general instructions, refer to page 195. 3. Press the bulb gently into the socket, turn
counterclockwise and remove.
4. Install the new bulb and bulb holder in re‐
verse order of removal.
Front fog lights

35-watt bulb, H8.
1. Use the back side of the screwdriver from

the onboard vehicle tool kit to remove the
three wheel house panel screws, arrow 1.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
199
Online
Carefully raise the wheel house panel, ar‐ Tail lights, bulb replacement
row 2.
Overview
2. Pull off the bulb connector, arrow 1.

Turn the bulb, arrow 2. 1 Turn signal
Left side of vehicle: turn clockwise. 2 Top brake lamp
Right side of vehicle: turn counterclock‐ 3 Reversing lamp

wise. 4 Rear lamp
Remove the bulb. 5 Bottom brake lights
Bulb replacement
Turn signal, brake, tail, rear or reversing lamp:
21-watt bulb, P21W
Rear fog lamp: 6-watt bulb, H6W.
Removing the tail lamp
3. Insert the new bulb, connect the connector 1. Open trunk lid.
and screw on the wheel house panel. 2. Open the two covers on the tail lamp.
Turn signal in exterior mirror

The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature
LED technology. Contact your service center
in the event of a malfunction.
3. With the handle of the screwdriver from the

onboard vehicle tool kit, loosen and re‐
move the nuts on the two fasteners. Make
sure that the nuts do not drop into the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
200
Online
bumper area. In addition to the two outer 3. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the
fasteners, there is another inner fastener. new bulb and attach the bulb holder to the
tail lamp. Make sure that the bulb holder
engages in all fasteners.
Installing the tail lamp

1. Connect the plug to the bulb holder.
2. Insert the tail lamp straight in and press it
in, arrow 1, until the rubber mount latches
in the inner fastener. Make sure when in‐
serting the tail lamp that the rubber lip, ar‐
4. Grasp the handle with one hand, arrow 1, row 2, on the top side of the tail lamp does
and brace with the free hand on the out‐ not fold over. Screw on the two nuts, ar‐
side, arrow 2. Carefully pry out the tail row 3, and close covers.
lamp, arrow 3, until the rubber mount re‐
leases from the inner fastener.
Central brake lamp and license plate

lamp
5. Remove the plug from the bulb holder.
Replacing the bulbs These lights are made using LED technology.
1. Loosen the six fasteners on the tail lamp, Contact your service center in the event of a
arrows 1, and remove the tail lamp from the malfunction.
lamp holder, arrow 2.
Changing wheels
Hints
When using run-flat tires or sealants, a tire
does not need to be changed immediately in
the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.
Which is why no spare tire is available.
The tools for changing wheels are available as
2. Press the defective bulb gently into the accessories from your service center.
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
201
Online
Jacking points for the vehicle jack The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
lowing cases:
▷ When making frequent short-distance
drives.
▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe‐
riods, longer than a month.
Hints
Do not connect charging devices to the
12 volt socket in the vehicle
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
Do not connect battery chargers to the fac‐
cated at the positions shown.
tory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as
this may damage the vehicle battery due to an
increased power consumption.◀
Vehicle battery
Starting aid terminals
Maintenance In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
The battery is maintenance-free. starting aid terminals, refer to page 206, in the
The added amount of acid is sufficient for the engine compartment with the engine off.
service life of the battery.
Further information about the battery can be Power failure
obtained from your service center. After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be newly initialized or individual set‐
Battery replacement tings updated, e. g.:
Use approved vehicle batteries only ▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐
tions again.
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; ▷ Time: update.
otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and ▷ Date: update.
systems or functions may not be fully availa‐
ble.◀ Disposing of old batteries
After a battery replacement, have the battery Have old batteries disposed of by your
registered on the vehicle by the service center service center or bring them to a recy‐
to ensure that all comfort features are fully cling center.
available and that any Check Control mes‐ Maintain the battery in an upright position for
sages of these comfort features are no longer transport and storage. Secure the battery so
displayed. that it does not tip over during transport.
Charging the battery
General information
Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery
remains usable for its full service life. I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
202
Online
Fuses 2. Attach the cover under the rubber lip and

then thread it between the bars.
Hints
Replacing fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐
tute of another color or amperage rating; this
could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐
sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse

types and locations are stored in the fuse box 3. Press down on the holder and tighten the
in the trunk. three screws.
In the engine compartment In the trunk

1. Use the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen
the three cover screws, arrow 1.
Fold up the cargo floor panel.
2. Squeeze and raise the holder, arrow 2.

3. Remove the cover from one side, arrow 3.
4. Press the four fasteners and remove the
cover.
Information on the fuse types and locations is

found on a separate sheet.
Attaching the covers

1. When attaching the cover, make sure that
all four fasteners are engaged.
I
nfor
mati
onPr
ovi
dedby:
203
Online
Mobility Breakdown assistance
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options Hints
This chapter describes all standard, country- Emergency Request not guaranteed
specific and optional features offered with the For technical reasons, the Emergency
series. It also describes features that are not Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor‐
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to able conditions.◀
also applies to safety-related functions and Overview
Hazard warning flashers
SOS button in the roofliner
Requirements
▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has
been activated.
The button is located in the center console. ▷ The radio-ready state is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
Intelligent Emergency Initiating an Emergency Request

Request 1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the
The concept button lights up green.
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐ ▷ The LED lights up green: an Emergency
quest can be made through this system. Request was initiated.
If a cancel prompt appears on the display,
General information the Emergency Request can be aborted.
Only press the SOS button in an emergency. If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
lished.
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection
to the BMW Response Center has been
established.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovidedby:
204
Online
Breakdown assistance Mobility
When the emergency request is received First aid kit

at the BMW Response Center, the BMW
Response Center contacts you and takes Note
further steps to help you.
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
Check the expiration dates of the contents
BMW Response Center can take further
regularly and replace any expired items
steps to help you under certain circum‐
promptly.
stances.
For this, data are transmitted to the BMW Storage
Response Center which serve to deter‐
mine the necessary rescue measures. E. g.
the current position of the vehicle, if it can
be established.
▷ If the LED is flashing green, but the BMW
Response Center can no longer be heard
via the speaker, you can nevertheless still
be heard at the BMW Response Center.
Initiating an Emergency Request

automatically The first aid kit is located in the trunk in the
storage compartment.
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐
ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS Jump-starting
button.
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
Warning triangle started using the battery of another vehicle
and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
Hints
Do not touch live parts
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in‐
jury, always avoid all contact with electrical
components while the engine is running.◀
The warning triangle is located on the inside of To prevent personal injury or damage to both
the trunk lid. vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.
To remove, loosen the bracket.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
205
Online
Preparation Connecting the cables

Bodywork contact between vehicles 1. Open the cover of the BMW starting aid
terminal.
Make sure that there is no contact be‐
tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐ 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
wise, there is a danger of short circuits.◀ jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐ aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor‐ tance.
mation can be found on the battery.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐ of the cable to the positive terminal of the
cle. battery, or to the corresponding starting
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
consumers in both vehicles. 4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
Starting aid terminals the battery, or to the corresponding engine
Connecting order or body ground of assisting vehicle.
Connect the jumper cables in the correct 5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
order to prevent risk of injury from arcing.◀ negative terminal of the battery, or to the
corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle

and let it run for several minutes at an in‐
creased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐ started in the usual way.
gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐ If the first starting attempt is not success‐
tive terminal. ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. other attempt in order to allow the dis‐
charged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order.
Check the battery and recharge if needed.
The body ground or a special nut acts as the

battery negative terminal.
Informat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
206
Online
Tow-starting and towing Tow truck
Note With rear-wheel drive

For tow-starting or towing, switch off the
Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐
tions of the individual braking systems might
lead to accidents.◀
Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Your vehicle should be transported with a tow
Towing truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Follow the towing instructions
Do not lift the vehicle
Follow all towing instructions; otherwise,
vehicle damage or accidents may occur.◀ Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage
▷ Make sure that the ignition is switched on; may result.◀
otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, turn
signals, and wipers may be unavailable.
With xDrive
▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
tilted, as the front wheels could turn.
▷ When the engine is stopped, there is no
power assist. Consequently, more force
needs to be applied when braking and
steering.
▷ Larger steering wheel movements are re‐
quired.
▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, The vehicle should only be transported on a
it will not be possible to control the vehi‐ loading platform.
cle's response.
Do not tow with only the front or rear axle
raised
Do not tow the BMW with just the front or rear
axle raised; otherwise, the wheels could lock
up and the transfer case could be damaged.◀

Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
may result.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
207
Online
Steptronic transmission: transporting Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly

your vehicle Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may
Note cause damage.◀
Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
Therefore, contact a service center in the
pending on local regulations.
event of a breakdown.
▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
Do not have the vehicle towed identify the vehicle being towed by placing
Have your vehicle transported on a load‐ a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc‐ dow.
cur.◀
Tow bar
Tow truck The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe
the following:
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an offset.
The vehicle should only be transported on a Tow rope

loading platform. When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses
Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or
on the vehicle components when towing, al‐
ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
may result.◀
Use tow fitting located in the front only for po‐ Tow fitting
sitioning the vehicle. The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle.
Towing other vehicles The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front
or rear of the BMW.
Hints
Light towing vehicle
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse.◀
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
208
Online
Manual transmission
If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but
start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
page 205. If the vehicle is equipped with a cat‐
alytic converter, only tow-start while the en‐
gine is cold.
1. Switch on the hazard warning system and

comply with local regulations.
The tow fitting is located in the onboard vehi‐ 2. Ignition, refer to page 67, on.
cle tool kit under the cargo floor panel. 3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the
Tow fitting, information on use
clutch pedal pressed and slowly release
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the pedal. After the engine starts, immedi‐
the vehicle and screw it all the way in. ately press on the clutch pedal again.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved 5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
roads only. bar or rope, and switch off the hazard
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g., warning system.
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. 6. Have the vehicle checked.
Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the
vehicle can occur.◀
Screw thread for tow fitting
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to

push it out.
Tow-starting
Steptronic transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
the Steptronic transmission.
Have the cause of the starting problems fixed.
I
nfor
mat ionPr
ovi
dedby:
209
Online
Mobility Care
Care
Vehicle features and options outside of the vehicle for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.◀
Automatic car washes
Hints
also applies to safety-related functions and Do not use high pressure washing sys‐
systems. The respectively applicable country tems
provisions must be observed when using the With washing systems operating at high pres‐
respective features and systems. sures and nozzle positions close to the win‐
dows, drops of water can penetrate.◀
▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or

Car washes
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage.
General information
Regularly remove foreign objects such as ▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
leaves in the area below the windshield when damaged by the transport mechanisms.
the hood is raised. ▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in may be damaged, depending on the width
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐ of the vehicle.
age the vehicle. ▷ Unscrew the rod antenna.
▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to
Hints page 73, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐
Steam jets or high-pressure washers vation.
When using steam jets or high-pressure ▷ Do not treat the convertible top with wax.
washers, hold them a sufficient distance away Ensure that a cycle without wax or a spe‐
and use a maximum temperature of cial cycle for convertibles is available.
140 ℉/60 ℃. ▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can
Holding them too close or using excessively be triggered by the interior motion sensor
high pressures or temperatures can cause of the alarm system. Follow the instruc‐
damage or preliminary damage that may then tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm,
lead to long-term damage. refer to page 45.
Follow the user's manual for the high-pressure Guide rails in car washes
washer.◀ Avoid car washes with guide rails higher
than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body
Cleaning sensors/camera lenses with
could be damaged.◀
high-pressure washers
When using high-pressure washers, do not
Before driving into a car wash
spray the sensors and camera lenses on the
In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a
I
nfor
mat
i car
onProvwash,
i
dedb take
y: the following steps:
210
Online
Care Mobility
Manual transmission: Headlights

1. Drive into the car wash. ▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
acidic cleansers.
2. Shift to neutral.
▷ Soak areas that have been dirtied e. g.,
3. Switch the engine off.
from insects, with shampoo and wash off
4. Switch on the ignition. with water.
Steptronic transmission: ▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an
1. Drive into the car wash. ice scraper.
2. Engage selector lever position N.

After washing the vehicle
3. Switch the engine off. After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
In this way, the ignition remains switched briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐ can be reduced and corrosion of the brake
played. discs can occur.
Do not turn off the ignition in the car Completely remove all residues on the win‐
wash dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash; smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
otherwise, selector lever position P is en‐ wiper blade wear.
gaged and damages can result.◀
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside Vehicle care
when in selector lever position N. A signal
sounds when an attempt is made to lock the Car care products
vehicle.
BMW recommends using care and cleaning
To start the engine with manual transmission: products from BMW, since these have been
1. Press on the clutch pedal. tested and approved.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. Car care and cleaning products

To start the engine with Steptronic transmis‐ Follow the instructions on the container.
sion: When cleaning the interior, open the doors or
windows.
Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐
cles.
Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐
Cleansers can contain substances that are
ping on the brake turns the ignition off.
dangerous and harmful to your health.◀
Selector lever position
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐ Vehicle paint
cally: Regular care contributes to driving safety and
value retention. Environmental influences in
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
▷ After approx. 15 minutes. taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
quency and extent of your car care to these
I
nf or
mat
ionPr
ov i
dedby:
influences.
211
Online
Mobility Care
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, To remove heavy soiling, especially for light
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐ colored convertible tops, use a special
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐ convertible top cleaner.
tered or discolored. Proceed as follows:
Caring for the convertible top 1. Spray the convertible top with the
convertible top cleaner.
The appearance and life of the convertible top
depend on correct care and operation. 2. Make the convertible top cleaner foam up
using a well saturated sponge, moving it in
Note the following instructions:
circular motions.
▷ To prevent water stains, mildew spots, and
3. Finish washing the vehicle in the car wash
chafe marks, do not enclose the
or rinse with ample amounts of water.
convertible top in the convertible top well
for a long period and do not fold and stow Otherwise, follow the instructions for use from
the convertible top in the convertible top the manufacturer.
well while the top is wet or frozen. Treat the convertible top with an impregnating
▷ Remove water stains that may neverthe‐ agent after it has been washed three to five
less have appeared on the roofliner using a times.
microfiber cloth and an interior cleaner. Suitable cleaners and car products can be ob‐
▷ When the vehicle is parked in enclosed tained from the service department.
areas for lengthy periods, ensure that the
area is well ventilated. Leather care
▷ If possible, park the vehicle in the shade to Remove dust from the leather often, using a
protect it from intensive solar radiation so cloth or vacuum cleaner.
that color, rubber and fabric are not af‐ Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
fected. chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
▷ Remove bird droppings immediately as wear and premature degradation of the leather
their corrosive effect will otherwise attack surface.
the convertible top and damage the rubber To guard against discoloration, such as from
seals. clothing, provide leather care roughly every
▷ Hard to remove tree sap or bird droppings two months.
can be removed from the convertible top Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
with special tree sap remover and a soft cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
brush. more visible.
Do not use spot remover Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and
Do not use spot remover, paint thinner, grease will gradually break down the protective
solvent, gasoline, or similar products to re‐ layer of the leather surface.
move spots on the convertible top. These Suitable care products are available from the
products may destroy the rubber coating. In‐ service center.
correct care and cleaning may cause the
convertible top and its seams to become Upholstery material care
leaky.◀ Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
212
Online
Care Mobility
If upholstery is very dirty, e.g., with beverage Plastic components

stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth These include:
with a suitable interior cleaner.
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
▷ Roofliner.
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the
material vigorously. ▷ Lamp lenses.
Damage from Velcro® fasteners ▷ Instrument cluster cover.
Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or ▷ Matt black spray-coated components.

other articles of clothing can damage the seat ▷ Painted parts in the interior.
covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are Clean with a microfiber cloth.
closed.◀
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
Do not soak the roofliner.
Caring for special components
No cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
Light-alloy wheels vents
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐ to surface damage.◀
turer's instructions.
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents Safety belts
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
components, such as the brake disk. thus have a negative impact on safety.
Chemical cleaning
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐ Do not clean chemically; this can destroy
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply the webbing.◀
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐ Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety
ularly when they have been exposed to road belts clipped into their buckles.
salt.
Do not allow the reels to retract the safety
belts until they are dry.
Rubber components
Aside from water, treat only with rubber Carpets and floor mats
cleansers.
No objects in the area around the pedals
When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any
silicon-containing car care products in order to Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other
avoid damage or noises. objects out of the pedal area; otherwise, the
function of the pedals could be impeded while
driving and create the risk of an accident.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐ Do not place additional floor mats over existing
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a mats or other objects.
soft cloth. Only use floor mats that have been approved
for the vehicle and can be properly attached to
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ov i
dedby:
floor.
213
Online
Mobility Care
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐

tened again after they were removed for clean‐
ing, e.g.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐
rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
detergent.
Displays/monitors
Cleaning displays and screens
Do not use any chemical or household
cleaning agents; otherwise, surfaces can be af‐
fected.◀
Keeping out moisture

Keep all fluids and moisture away from
the unit; otherwise, electrical components can
be damaged.◀
Avoid pressure
Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning
and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise,
damage can result.◀
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
Long-term
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
three months, special measures must be
taken. Additional information is available from
the service center.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
214
Online
Care Mobility
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
215
Online
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Online
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Online
Reference Technical data
Technical data
Note
The technical data and specifications in this found in the approval documents, on informa‐
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. tion signs on the vehicle or can be obtained
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, from the service center.
for example, due to the selected special equip‐ The information in the vehicle documents al‐
ment, country version or country-specific ways has priority.
measurement method. Detailed values can be
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate,
model version, equipment or country-specific for example, due to the selected special equip‐
measurement method. ment, tires, load and chassis version.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for example, a roof antenna,
2 Series
Width with mirrors inches/mm 78.2/1,984
Width without mirrors inches/mm 69.8/1,774
Height inches/mm 55.2–55.6/1,403–

1,413
Length inches/mm 174.7–175.9/4,437–

4,469
Wheelbase inches/mm 105.9/2,690
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 35.8–37.1/10.9–11.3
Weights
The values preceding the slash apply to vehi‐ lowing the slash apply to vehicles with Step‐
I
nf
cles with manual transmission; the valueso r
mat
fol‐ i
onProvide
tronic dby:
transmission.
218
Online
Technical data Reference
228i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,395

kg 1,994
Load lbs/kg 680/308
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 1,985/900
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,495/1,132
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 9.8–11.8/280–335
M235i powered by BMW M
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,475/4,520

kg 2,030/2,050
Load lbs/kg 680/308
228i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs 4,540

kg 2,059
Load lbs/kg 680/308
Capacities
US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank, approx. 13.7/52 Fuel quality, refer to

page 172
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
219
Online
Reference Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A Alternating-code hand-held B
transmitter 144
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ Alternative oil types 191 Backrest curvature, refer to
tem 117 Ambient light 98 Lumbar support 56
Acceleration Assistant, refer Antifreeze, washer fluid 74 Backrest, width 56
to Launch Control 78 Antilock Brake System, Band-aids, refer to First aid
Accessories and parts 7 ABS 117 kit 205
Activated-charcoal filter 140 Anti-slip control, refer to Bar for tow-starting/
Adaptive brake lights, refer to DSC 117 towing 208
Brake force display 116 Approved axle load 218 Battery replacement, vehicle
Adaptive Light Control 95 Approved engine oils, see battery 202
Additives, oil 190 Suitable engine oil Battery replacement, vehicle
Adjustments, seats/head re‐ types 191 remote control 35
straints 54 Arrival time 90 Battery, vehicle 202
After washing vehicle 211 Ash tray 147 Belts, safety belts 58
Airbags 99 Assistance when driving Beverage holder, cu‐
Airbags, indicator/warning off 121 pholder 153
light 100 Attentiveness assistant 116 BMW Assist, see user's
Air circulation, refer to Recir‐ AUTO intensity 139 manual for Navigation, En‐
culated-air mode 137, 139 Automatic car wash 210 tertainment and Communi‐
Air, dehumidifying, refer to Automatic climate con‐ cation
Cooling function 136, 139 trol 135 BMW Driver’s Guide App 6
Air distribution, Automatic Curb Monitor 61 BMW Homepage 6
manual 136, 140 Automatic deactivation, front- BMW Internet page 6
Air flow, air conditioner 136 seat passenger airbags 101 BMW maintenance sys‐
Air flow, automatic climate Automatic headlight con‐ tem 193
control 140 trol 95 Bonus range, ECO PRO 163
Air pressure, tires 174 Automatic locking 44 Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐
Air vents, refer to Ventila‐ Automatic recirculated-air pholder 153
tion 141 control 139 Brake assistant 117
Alarm system 44 Automatic transmission, see Brake discs, break-in 156
Alarm, unintentional 45 Steptronic transmission 75 Brake force display 116
All around the center con‐ AUTO program, automatic cli‐ Brake lights, adaptive 116
sole 16 mate control 139 Brake lights, brake force dis‐
All around the roofliner 17 AUTO program, climate con‐ play 116
All around the steering trol 136 Brake pads, break-in 156
wheel 14 AUTO program, intensity 139 Braking, hints 157
All-season tires, refer to Win‐ Auto Start/Stop function 69 Breakdown assistance 204
ter tires 181 Average fuel consumption 90 Break-in 156
All-wheel-drive 118 Average speed 90 Brightness of Control Dis‐
Axle I
loads,
nfor
weights
mat i
onPr
218
ovidedby:
play 92
220
Online
Everything from A to Z Reference
Bulb replacement 195 Changes, technical, refer to Compressor 182

Bulb replacement, front 196 Safety 7 Condensation on win‐
Bulb replacement, rear 200 Changing parts 195 dows 140
Bulbs and lights 195 Changing wheels 201 Condensation under the vehi‐
Button, Start/Stop 67 Changing wheels/tires 180 cle 158
Bypassing, refer to Jump- Chassis number, see vehicle Condition Based Service
starting 205 identification number 9 CBS 193
Check Control 81 Configuring driving pro‐
C Checking the oil level elec‐ gram 121
tronically 189 Confirmation signal 43
California Proposition 65 Children, seating position 64 ConnectedDrive, see user's
Warning 7 Children, transporting manual for Navigation, En‐
Camera lenses, care 214 safely 64 tertainment and Communi‐
Camera, rearview cam‐ Child restraint fixing sys‐ cation
era 128 tem 64 ConnectedDrive Services
Can holder, refer to Cu‐ Child restraint fixing system Connecting electrical devi‐
pholder 153 LATCH 66 ces 147
Car battery 202 Child restraint fixing systems, Continued driving with a flat
Car care products 211 mounting 64 tire 105, 108
Care, displays 214 Child seat, mounting 64 Control Display 18
Care, vehicle 211 Child seats 64 Control Display, settings 91
Cargo 159 Chrome parts, care 213 Controller 18, 19
Cargo area, enlarging 149 Cigarette lighter 147 Control systems, driving sta‐
Cargo area partition 49 Cleaning displays 214 bility 117
Cargo area, storage compart‐ Climate control 135, 138 Convenient closing with the
ments 153 Clock 85 remote control 38
Cargo, securing 160 Closing/opening via door Convenient opening with the
Cargo straps, securing lock 39 remote control 37
cargo 160 Closing/opening with remote Convertible, convertible
Car key, refer to Remote con‐ control 37 top 47
trol 34 Coasting 165 Convertible mode, automatic
Carpet, care 213 Coasting with engine decou‐ climate control 136, 139
Car wash 210 pled, coasting 165 Convertible program, auto‐
Catalytic converter, refer to Coasting with idling en‐ matic climate con‐
Hot exhaust system 157 gine 165 trol 136, 139
CBS Condition Based Serv‐ Cockpit 14 Convertible top 47
ice 193 Combination reel, refer to Convertible top, care 212
CD/Multimedia, see user's Turn signals 71 Convertible top, cargo area
manual for Navigation, En‐ Combination switch, refer to partition 49
tertainment and Communi‐ Wiper system 72 Convertible top, emergency
cation Comfort Access 41 operation 49
Center armrest 152 COMFORT program, Dy‐ Convertible top, rollover pro‐
Center console 16 namic Driving Control 121 tection system 102
Central locking system 40 Compartments in the Coolant 192
Central screen, refer to Con‐ doors 152 Coolant level 192
trol Display 18 Compass 145 Coolant temperature 84
I
nformat i
onPr ovidedby:
221
Online
Cooling function 136, 139 Displays, cleaning 214 ECO PRO driving style analy‐
Cooling, maximum 139 Disposal, coolant 192 sis 166
Cooling system 192 Disposal, vehicle battery 202 ECO PRO mode 162
Cornering light 95 Distance control, refer to ECO PRO Tip - driving in‐
Corrosion on brake discs 158 PDC 125 struction 164
Cosmetic mirror 147 Distance to destination 90 EfficientDynamics 165
Courtesy lamps during un‐ Divided screen view, split Electronic displays, instru‐
locking 37 screen 23 ment cluster 80
Courtesy lamps with the vehi‐ Door lock 39 Electronic oil measure‐
cle locked 38 Door lock, refer to Remote ment 189
Cruise control 123 control 34 Electronic Stability Program
Cruising range 85 Drive-off assistant 121 ESP, refer to DSC 117
Cupholder 153 Drive-off assistant, refer to Emergency detection, remote
Current fuel consumption 85 DSC 117 control 35
Driver assistance, refer to In‐ Emergency operation,
D telligent Safety 108 convertible top 49
Driving Assistant, refer to In‐ Emergency release, fuel filler
Damage, tires 180 telligent Safety 108 flap 170
Damping control, dy‐ Driving Dynamics Con‐ Emergency Request 204
namic 119 trol 119 Emergency start function, en‐
Data, technical 218 Driving instructions, break- gine start 35
Date 85 in 156 Emergency unlocking, trans‐
Daytime running lights 95 Driving mode 119 mission lock 78
Daytime running lights, bulb Driving notes, general 156 Emergency unlocking, trunk
replacement 198 Driving stability control sys‐ lid 41
Defrosting, refer to defrosting tems 117 Energy Control 85
the windows 136 Driving style analysis 166 Energy recovery 86
Defrosting, refer to Windows, Driving tips 156 Engine, automatic Start/Stop
defrosting 140 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ function 69
Defrosting the windows 136 trol 117 Engine, automatic switch-
Dehumidifying, air 136, 139 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ off 69
Deleting personal data 25 trol 118 Engine compartment 187
Deletion of personal data 25 Dynamic Damping Con‐ Engine compartment, work‐
Destination distance 90 trol 119 ing in 188
Digital clock 85 Dynamic Stability Control Engine coolant 192
Digital compass 145 DSC 117 Engine idling when driving,
Dimensions 218 Dynamic Traction Control coasting 165
Dimmable exterior mirrors 62 DTC 118 Engine oil 189
Dimmable interior rearview Engine oil, adding 190
mirror 62 E Engine oil additives 190
Direction indicator, refer to Engine oil change 191
Turn signals 71 ECO PRO 162 Engine oil filler neck 190
Display, electronic, instru‐ ECO PRO, bonus range 163 Engine oil types, alterna‐
ment cluster 80 ECO PRO display 162 tive 191
Display lighting, refer to In‐ ECO PRO driving mode 162 Engine oil types, ap‐
strument lighting 97 proved 191
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
222
Online
Engine start during malfunc‐ Floor carpet, care 213 Gross vehicle weight, ap‐
tion 35 Floor mats, care 213 proved 218
Engine start, jump-start‐ Fogged up windows 136
ing 205 Fold down the rear seat back‐ H
Engine start, refer to Starting rest, see Though-loading
the engine 68 system 149 Halogen headlights, bulb re‐
Engine stop 68 Fold-out position, wiper 74 placement 196
Entering a car wash 210 Foot brake 157 Handbrake, refer to parking
Equipment, interior 143 Front airbags 99 brake 71
Error displays, see Check Front-end collision warning Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
Control 81 with City Braking func‐ nating code 144
ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐ tion 109 Hazard warning flashers 204
gram, refer to DSC 117 Front fog lights 97 Headlight control, auto‐
Exchanging wheels/tires 180 Front fog lights, front, bulb re‐ matic 95
Exhaust system 157 placement 199 Headlight courtesy delay fea‐
Exterior mirror, automatic Front lights 196 ture 95
dimming feature 62 front-seat passenger airbags, Headlight flasher 72
Exterior mirrors 61 automatic deactivation 101 Headlight flasher, bulb re‐
External start 205 Front-seat passenger airbags, placement 198
External temperature dis‐ indicator lamp 101 Headlight glass 196
play 85 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 107 Headlights 196
External temperature warn‐ Fuel 172 Headlights, care 211
ing 85 Fuel consumption, refer to Headlight washer system 72
Eyes for securing cargo 160 Average fuel consump‐ Head restraints 54
tion 90 Head restraints, front 59
F Fuel filler flap 170 Head restraints, rear 59
Fuel gauge 84 Heavy cargo, stowing 160
Failure message, see Check Fuel lid 170 High-beam Assistant 96
Control 81 Fuel quality 172 High beams 72
False alarm, refer to Uninten‐ Fuel recommendation 172 High beams/low beams, refer
tional alarm 45 Fuel, tank capacity 219 to High-beam Assistant 96
Fan, refer to Air Fuse 203 High beams, bulb replace‐
flow 136, 140 ment 198
Filler neck for engine oil 190 G Hills 158
Fine wood, care 213 Hill start assistant, refer to
First aid kit 205 Garage door opener, refer to Drive-off assistant 121
Fitting for towing, see Tow fit‐ Universal Integrated Remote Hints 6
ting 208 Control 143 Holder for beverages 153
Flat tire, changing Gasoline 172 Homepage 6
wheels 201 Gear change, Steptronic Hood 188
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 107 transmission 76 Horn 14
Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐ Gear shift indicator 87 Hotel function, trunk lid 41
tor TPM 103 General driving notes 156 Hot exhaust system 157
Flat tire, warning Glare shield 147 Hydroplaning 157
lamp 104, 107 Glove compartment 151
Flooding 157
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
223
Online
I Interior equipment 143 Lashing eyes, securing

Interior lights 97 cargo 160
Ice warning, see External Interior lights during unlock‐ LATCH child restraint sys‐
temperature warning 85 ing 37 tem 66
Icy roads, see External tem‐ Interior lights with the vehicle Launch Control 78
perature warning 85 locked 38 Leather, care 212
Identification marks, tires 178 Interior motion sensor 45 LEDs, light-emitting di‐
Identification number, see ve‐ Interior rearview mirror, auto‐ odes 196
hicle identification num‐ matic dimming feature 62 Letters and numbers, enter‐
ber 9 Interior rearview mirror, com‐ ing 25
iDrive 18 pass 145 Light alloy wheels, care 213
Ignition key, refer to Remote Interior rearview mirror, man‐ Light control 95
control 34 ually dimmable 62 Light-emitting diodes,
Ignition off 67 Internet page 6 LEDs 196
Ignition on 67 Interval display, service re‐ Lighter 147
Indication of a flat quirements 86 Lighting 94
tire 104, 107 Interval mode 73 Lights 94
Indicator and alarm lamps, Lights and bulbs 195
see Check Control 81 J Light switch 94
Indicator lamp, see Check Load 160
Control 81 Jacking points for the vehicle Loading 159
Individual air distribu‐ jack 202 Lock, door 39
tion 136, 140 Joystick, Steptronic transmis‐ Locking/unlocking via door
Individual settings, refer to sion 76 lock 39
Personal Profile 35 Jump-starting 205 Locking/unlocking with re‐
Inflation pressure, tires 174 mote control 37
Inflation pressure warning, K Locking, automatic 44
tires 107 Locking, settings 43
Info display, refer to On- Key/remote control 34 Locking via trunk lid 41
Board computer 89 Keyless Go, refer to Comfort Low beams 94
Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐ Access 41 Low beams, automatic, refer
tor TPM 104 Key Memory, refer to Per‐ to High-beam Assistant 96
Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor sonal Profile 35 Lower back support 56
FTM 107 Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐ Lumbar support 56
Instrument cluster 80 mission 75
Instrument cluster, electronic Knee airbag 99 M
displays 80
Instrument lighting 97 L Maintenance 193
Integrated key 34 Maintenance require‐
Integrated Owner's Manual in Lamp replacement 195 ments 193
the vehicle 30 Lamp replacement, front 196 Maintenance, service require‐
Intelligent Emergency Re‐ Lamp replacement, rear 200 ments 86
quest 204 Lane departure warning 114 Maintenance system,
Intelligent Safety 108 Lane margin, warning 114 BMW 193
Intensity, AUTO pro‐ Language on Control Dis‐ Make-up mirror 147
gram 139 play 92
Informati
onPr ovidedby:
224
Online
Malfunction displays, see Modifications, technical, refer Oil types, approved 191
Check Control 81 to Safety 7 Old batteries, disposal 202
Manual air distribu‐ Moisture in headlight 196 On-board computer 89
tion 136, 140 Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐ On-board computer, refer to
Manual air flow 136, 140 play 18 On-board computer 89
Manual mode, Steptronic Mounting of child restraint Onboard monitor, refer to
transmission 76 systems 64 Control Display 18
Manual operation, door Multifunction steering wheel, Onboard vehicle tool kit 195
lock 39 buttons 14 Opening/closing via door
Manual operation, exterior lock 39
mirrors 61 N Opening and closing 34
Manual operation, fuel filler Opening and closing, without
flap 170 Navigation, see user's manual remote control 39
Manual operation, Park Dis‐ for Navigation, Entertain‐ Opening and closing, with re‐
tance Control PDC 126 ment and Communication mote control 37
Manual operation, rearview Neck restraints, front, refer to Operating concept, iDrive 18
camera 128 Head restraints 59 Optional equipment, standard
Manual transmission 75 Neck restraints, rear, refer to equipment 6
Marking on approved Head restraints 59 Outside air, refer to Auto‐
tires 181 Neutral cleaner, see wheel matic recirculated-air con‐
Marking, run-flat tires 182 cleaner 213 trol 139
Master key, refer to Remote New wheels and tires 180 Overheating of engine, refer
control 34 Nylon rope for tow-starting/ to Coolant temperature 84
Maximum cooling 139 towing 208
Maximum speed, display 87 P
Maximum speed, winter O
tires 181 Paint, vehicle 211
Measure, units of 92 OBD Onboard Diagnosis 194 Parallel parking assistant 130
Medical kit 205 OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐ Park Distance Control
Memory, seat, mirror 60 agnosis 194 PDC 125
Menu, EfficientDynamics 165 Obstacle marking, rearview Parked-car ventilation 141
Menu in instrument clus‐ camera 129 Parked vehicle, condensa‐
ter 88 Octane rating, refer to Rec‐ tion 158
Menus, operating, iDrive 18 ommended fuel grade 172 Parking aid, refer to PDC 125
Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐ Odometer 84 Parking assistant 130
ing concept 20 Office, see user's manual for Parking brake 71
Messages, see Check Con‐ Navigation, Entertainment Parking lights 94
trol 81 and Communication Parking lights, bulb replace‐
Microfilter 137, 140 Oil 189 ment 198
Minimum tread, tires 180 Oil, adding 190 Parts and accessories 7
Mirror 61 Oil additives 190 Passenger side mirror, tilting
Mirror memory 60 Oil change 191 downward 61
Mobile communication devi‐ Oil change interval, service Pathway lines, rearview cam‐
ces in the vehicle 157 requirements 86 era 129
Mobility System 182 Oil filler neck 190 PDC Park Distance Con‐
Oil types, alternative 191 trol 125
Inf or mat i
onPr ovidedby:
225
Online
Pedestrian warning with city Recommended tire Safety systems, airbags 99

braking function 112 brands 181 Saving fuel 161
Personal Profile 35 Refueling 170 Screen, refer to Control Dis‐
Personal Profile, exporting Remaining range 85 play 18
profiles 36 Remote control/key 34 Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐
Personal Profile, importing Remote control, malfunc‐ hicle tool kit 195
profiles 37 tion 39 Screw thread, see screw
Pinch protection system, win‐ Remote control, univer‐ thread for tow fitting, screw
dows 46 sal 143 thread for tow fitting 209
Plastic, care 213 Replacement fuse 203 Sealant 182
Power failure 202 Replacing parts 195 Seat and mirror memory 60
Power windows 46 Replacing wheels/tires 180 Seat belts, refer to Safety
Pressure, tire air pres‐ Reporting safety defects 9 belts 58
sure 174 RES button, see Cruise con‐ Seat heating, front 57
Pressure warning, tires 107 trol 123 Seating position for chil‐
Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐ Reserve warning, refer to dren 64
file 35 Range 85 Seats 54
Programmable memory but‐ Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor Selection list in instrument
tons, iDrive 24 TPM 104 cluster 88
Protective function, win‐ Retaining straps, securing Selector lever, Steptronic
dows 46 cargo 160 transmission 76
Push-and-turn switch, refer to Retreaded tires 181 Sensors, care 214
Controller 18, 19 Roadside parking lights 95 Service and warranty 8
Rollover protection sys‐ Service requirements, Condi‐
R tem 102 tion Based Service
RON recommended fuel CBS 193
Radiator fluid 192 grade 172 Service requirements, dis‐
Radio-operated key, refer to Roofliner 17 play 86
Remote control 34 Rope for tow-starting/ Services, ConnectedDrive
Radio ready state 67 towing 208 Servotronic 119
Radio, see user's manual for RSC Run Flat System Com‐ SET button, see Cruise con‐
Navigation, Entertainment ponent, refer to Run-flat trol 123
and Communication tires 182 Settings, locking/unlock‐
Rain sensor 73 Rubber components, ing 43
Rear lights 200 care 213 Settings on Control Dis‐
Rear socket 148 Run-flat tires 182 play 91
Rearview camera 128 Settings, storing for seat, mir‐
Rearview mirror 61 S ror 60
Rear window de‐ Shift paddles on the steering
froster 136, 140 Safe braking 157 wheel 77
Recirculated-air filter 140 Safety 7 Side airbags 99
Recirculated-air Safety belt reminder for driv‐ Signaling, horn 14
mode 137, 139 er's seat and front passen‐ Signals when unlocking 43
Recommended fuel ger seat 59 Sitting safely 54
grade 172 Safety belts 58 Size 218
Safety belts, care 213 Snow chains 185
I
nformat i
onPr ovi
dedby:
226
Online
Socket 147 Storage, tires 182 Tire sealant 182

Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐ Storing the vehicle 214 Tires, everything on wheels
nostics 194 Suitable engine oils 191 and tires 174
SOS button 204 Summer tires, tread 180 Tires, run-flat tires 182
Spare fuse 203 Sun visor 147 Tire tread 180
Specified engine oil Supplementary text mes‐ Tone, see user's manual for
types 191 sages 83 Navigation, Entertainment
Speed, average 90 Switch for Dynamic Driv‐ and Communication
Speed limit detection, on- ing 119 Tool 195
board computer 90 Switch-on times, parked-car Total vehicle weight 218
Speed limiter, display 87 ventilation 142 Touchpad 21
Speed Limit Information 87 Switch, refer to Cockpit 14 Tow fitting 208
Speed warning 91 Symbols 6 Towing 207
Split screen 23 Symbols in the status field 23 Tow lug, see Tow fitting 208
SPORT+ - program, Dynamic Tow-starting 207
Driving Control 120 T Tow truck 207
Sport displays, torque dis‐ TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐
play, performance dis‐ Tachometer 84 tor 103
play 91 Tail lights 200 Traction control 118
SPORT program, Dynamic Technical changes, refer to TRACTION, driving dynam‐
Driving Control 120 Safety 7 ics 118
Sport program, transmis‐ Technical data 218 Transmission lock, electronic
sion 76 Telephone, see user's manual unlocking 78
Sport steering, variable 119 for Navigation, Entertain‐ Transmission, manual trans‐
Stability control systems 117 ment and Communication mission 75
Start/stop, automatic func‐ Temperature, automatic cli‐ Transmission, Steptronic
tion 69 mate control 136, 138 transmission 75
Start/Stop button 67 Temperature display for ex‐ Transporting children
Start function during malfunc‐ ternal temperature 85 safely 64
tion 35 Terminal, starting aid 206 Tread, tires 180
Starting the engine 68 Text messages, supplemen‐ Trip computer 90
Status control display, tary 83 Triple turn signal activa‐
tires 104 Theft alarm system, refer to tion 72
Status information, iDrive 23 Alarm system 44 Trip odometer 84
Status of Owner's Manual 7 Thigh support 56 Truck for tow-starting/
Steering assistance 119 Through-loading system 149 towing 207
Steering wheel, adjusting 63 Tilt alarm sensor 45 Trunk, cargo area partition 49
Steering wheel heating 63 Time of arrival 90 Trunk lid closing 41
Steptronic Sport transmis‐ Tire damage 180 Trunk lid, emergency unlock‐
sion, refer to Steptronic Tire identification marks 178 ing 41
transmission 75 Tire inflation pressure 174 Trunk lid, hotel function 41
Steptronic transmission 75 Tire inflation pressure moni‐ Trunk lid opening 40
Stopping the engine 68 tor, refer to FTM 107 Trunk lid via remote con‐
Storage compartment in the Tire Pressure Monitor trol 38
rear 153 TPM 103 Turning circle lines, rearview
Storage compartments 151 Tires, changing 180 camera 129
I
nf or mat i
onPr ovidedby:
227
Online
Turn signals, operation 71 W Wiper system 72

Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐ Wood, care 213
placement 200 Warning and indicator lamps, Word match concept, naviga‐
see Check Control 81 tion 25
U Warning displays, see Check Wrench, see Onboard vehicle
Control 81 tool kit 195
Unintentional alarm 45 Warning messages, see
Units of measure 92 Check Control 81 X
Universal remote control 143 Warning triangle 205
Unlock button, Steptronic Warranty 7 xDrive 118
transmission 76 Washer fluid 74 Xenon headlights, bulb re‐
Unlocking/locking via door Washer nozzles, wind‐ placement 198
lock 39 shield 74
Unlocking/locking with re‐ Washer system 72
mote control 37 Washing, vehicle 210
Unlocking, settings 43 Water on roads 157
Updates made after the edito‐ Weights 218
rial deadline 7 Welcome lamps during un‐
Upholstery care 212 locking 37
USB interface 148 Welcome lights 94
Wheel cleaner 213
V Wheels, changing 180
Wheels, everything on wheels
Vanity mirror 147 and tires 174
Variable sport steering 119 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
Vehicle battery 202 FTM 107
Vehicle battery, replac‐ Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐
ing 202 tor TPM 103
Vehicle, break-in 156 Wind deflector 51
Vehicle care 211 Window defroster,
Vehicle features and op‐ rear 136, 140
tions 6 Windows, powered 46
Vehicle identification num‐ Windshield washer fluid 74
ber 9 Windshield washer noz‐
Vehicle jack 202 zles 74
Vehicle paint 211 Windshield washer sys‐
Vehicle storage 214 tem 72
Vehicle wash 210 Windshield wiper 72
Ventilation 141 Winter storage, care 214
Ventilation, refer to Parked- Winter tires, suitable
car ventilation 141 tires 181
VIN, see vehicle identification Winter tires, tread 180
number 9 Wiper 72
Voice activation system 27 Wiper blades, replacing 195
Wiper fluid 74
Wiper, fold-out position 74
Informat ionPr ovidedby:
228
Online
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:

More about BMW
The Ultimate
bmwusa.com Driving Machine®
01 40 2 959 847 ue
*BL295984700Y* I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Online

BMW 2 Series

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BMW 2 Series

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contents Owner's Manual

A-Z The Ultimate

THE BMW 2 SERIES

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.

ADDENDUM TO OWNER'S MANUAL

xenon headlights,” that text should be dis-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Vehicle features and options

Basic information Parts and accessories

wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone

For Canadian customers

All around the steering wheel

1 Power windows, all 46 Front fog lights 97

Lane departure warning 114

Automatic headlight con‐ 9 Steering wheel buttons, right

6 Steering column stalk, left Telephone, see user's manual for

Roadside parking lights 95

7 Steering wheel buttons, left Rain sensor 73

All around the center console

1 Control Display 18 9 Parking brake 71

11 Driving Dynamics Control 119

Dynamic Stability Control 117

All about the interior rearview mirror

1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ 3 Interior lights 97

2 Reading lights 97 4 Indicator lamp, front-seat pas‐

This chapter describes all standard, country- Hints

Control elements at a glance

Controller with navigation system

1. Turn. Press button Function

BACK Displays the previous panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

Controller without navigation system

3. Move in two directions.

Press button Function

MENU Open the main menu.

RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu.

NAV Opens the Navigation menu.

TEL Opens the phone menu.

Buttons on controller Selecting menu items

TEL Opens the phone menu.

BACK Open previous panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

2. Press the controller.

Changing between panels

Display of an opened menu

Entering letters and numbers

Move interactive map or Swipe into re‐

Enlarge/shrink interactive Drag in or out on

Display the menu or open Tap once.

6. Turn the controller to set the hours and Symbol Meaning

SIM card is blocked.

Status field Enter PIN.

Wireless network is not available.

Bluetooth is switched on.

Displaying the button assignment

Deleting personal in the Entering letters and numbers

▷ Personal Profile settings. Press the controller: delete the let‐

▷ Stored Favorites buttons. Press the controller for an extended

or Tip controller up.

▷ Target search: names of locations may be

Voice activation system